ITJEMAST 10(11) 2019

Volume 10 Issue 11 (2019) ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642

http://TuEngr.com

THE SELF-CONCEPT LEVEL IN THE MODIFIED ALMADINAH PROGRAM FOR TALENTED STUDENTS IN SAUDI ARABIA LONGITUDINAL FLOW OF A CONICAL DEFLECTOR WITH A STREAM OF VISCOUS INCOMPRESSIBLE LIQUID A QUALITY OF URBAN DESIGN ELEMENTS IN FISHING VILLAGE AT TELUK KUMBAR, PENANG ECOLOGICAL SPIRITUALITY OF SAKHA PEOPLE IN THE CONTEXT OF AN INDIGENOUS APPROACH FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC INDICATORS OF ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT: EVIDENCE FROM ASIAN COUNTRIES INNOVATIVE APPROACH AND STRATEGY FOR EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE MANAGEMENT OF TRADE ENTERPRISES INFORMATION STATE AS A SOCIAL COMMUNICATION: SERVICE AND NETWORK MODELS DETERMINATION OF THE DIFFERENTIATED PHOTOMETRIC BODY SYSTEM RADIATORS CHARACTERISTICS OF WATERPROOF LAMPS AN APPLICATION OF PETRI NETS IN TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS SYNTHESIS ISSUES ON AGRICULTURE

Cover photo is scheme of jet flow around a conical deflector from an article in this issue entitled Longitudinal Flow of a Conical Deflector with a Stream of Viscous Incompressible Liquid.

EFFECTS OF PARTICIPATIVE DECISION MAKING ON LEADERSHIP STYLES: A STUDENT SURVEY AT GOMAL UNIVERSITY, PAKISTAN BUSINESS STRATEGY, EARNINGS MANAGEMENT, AND IT MANAGEMENT DEVELOPMENT OF COMMUNITY CHARACTERISTICS ASSESSMENT TOOLS FOR SPEED LIMIT USING DECISIONMAKING THEORY: CASE OF THAILAND SLOPE STABILIZATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PONDS: CASE STUDY OF KHON BURI SUGAR MILL FACTORY, THAILAND

2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies.

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

International Editorial Board

Editor-in-Chief Ahmad Sanusi Hassan, PhD Professor Universiti Sains Malaysia, MALAYSIA

Executive Editor Boonsap Witchayangkoon, PhD Associate Professor Thammasat University, THAILAND

Editorial Board:

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mohamed Gadi (University of Nottingham, UNITED KINGDOM) Professor Dr.Hitoshi YAMADA (Yokohama National University, JAPAN) Professor Dr. Chuen-Sheng Cheng (Yuan Ze University, TAIWAN ) Professor Dr.Mikio SATOMURA (Shizuoka University, JAPAN) Professor Dr.Chuen-Sheng Cheng (Yuan Ze University, TAIWAN) Emeritus Professor Dr.Mike Jenks (Oxford Brookes University, UNITED KINGDOM ) Professor Dr.I Nyoman Pujawan (Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology, INDONESIA) Professor Dr.Toshio YOSHII (EHIME University, JAPAN) Professor Dr.Neven Duić (University of Zagreb, CROATIA) Professor Dr.Dewan Muhammad Nuruzzaman (University Malaysia Pahang MALAYSIA) Professor Dr.Masato SAITOH (Saitama University, JAPAN)

Scientific and Technical Committee & Editorial Review Board on Engineering, Technologies and Applied Sciences:

Associate Prof. Dr. Paulo Cesar Lima Segantine (University of São Paulo, BRASIL) Associate Prof. Dr. Kurt B. Wurm (New Mexico State University, USA ) Associate Prof. Dr. Truong V.B.Giang (Vietnam National University, Hanoi, VIETNAM) Associate Prof. Dr. Fatemeh Khozaei (Islamic Azad University Kerman Branch, IRAN) Assistant Prof.Dr. Zoe D. Ziaka (International Hellenic University, GREECE) Associate Prof.Dr. Junji SHIKATA (Yokohama National University, JAPAN) Assistant Prof.Dr. Akeel Noori Abdul Hameed (University of Sharjah, UAE) Assistant Prof.Dr. Rohit Srivastava (Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, INDIA) Assistant Prof. Dr.Muhammad Yar Khan (COMSATS University, Pakistan) Assistant Prof. Dr. David Kuria (Kimathi University College of Technology, KENYA ) Dr. Mazran bin Ismail (Universiti Sains Malaysia, MALAYSIA ) Dr. Salahaddin Yasin Baper (Salahaddin University - Hawler, IRAQ ) Dr. Foong Swee Yeok (Universiti Sains Malaysia, MALAYSIA) Dr.Azusa FUKUSHIMA (Kobe Gakuin University, JAPAN) Dr.Yasser Arab (Ittihad Private University, SYRIA).

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies.

:: International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

Volume 10 Issue 10 (2019) http://TuEngr.com

ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642

FEATURE PEER-REVIEWED ARTICLES THE SELF-CONCEPT LEVEL IN THE MODIFIED AL-MADINAH PROGRAM FOR TALENTED STUDENTS IN SAUDI ARABIA

10A11A

LONGITUDINAL FLOW OF A CONICAL DEFLECTOR WITH A STREAM OF VISCOUS INCOMPRESSIBLE LIQUID

10A11B

A QUALITY OF URBAN DESIGN ELEMENTS IN FISHING VILLAGE AT TELUK KUMBAR, PENANG

10A11C

ECOLOGICAL SPIRITUALITY OF SAKHA PEOPLE IN THE CONTEXT OF AN INDIGENOUS APPROACH

10A11D

FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC INDICATORS OF ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT: EVIDENCE FROM ASIAN COUNTRIES

10A11E

INNOVATIVE APPROACH AND STRATEGY FOR EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE MANAGEMENT OF TRADE ENTERPRISES

10A11F

INFORMATION STATE AS A SOCIAL COMMUNICATION: SERVICE AND NETWORK MODELS

10A11G

DETERMINATION OF THE DIFFERENTIATED PHOTOMETRIC BODY SYSTEM RADIATORS

10A11H

CHARACTERISTICS OF WATERPROOF LAMPS

10A11I

AN APPLICATION OF PETRI NETS IN TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS SYNTHESIS ISSUES ON AGRICULTURE

10A11J

i

EFFECTS OF PARTICIPATIVE DECISION MAKING ON LEADERSHIP STYLES: A STUDENT SURVEY AT GOMAL UNIVERSITY, PAKISTAN

10A11K

BUSINESS STRATEGY, EARNINGS MANAGEMENT, AND IT MANAGEMENT

10A11L

DEVELOPMENT OF COMMUNITY CHARACTERISTICS ASSESSMENT TOOLS FOR SPEED LIMIT USING DECISIONMAKING THEORY: CASE OF THAILAND

10A11M

SLOPE STABILIZATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PONDS: CASE STUDY OF KHON BURI SUGAR MILL FACTORY, THAILAND

10A11N

Contacts: Professor Dr.Ahmad Sanusi Hassan (Editor-in-Chief), School of Housing, Building and Planning, UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA, 11800 Minden, Penang, MALAYSIA. Tel: +60-4653-2835 Fax: +60-4-657 6523, Sanusi @ usm.my, Editor @ TuEngr.com Associate Professor Dr.Boonsap Witchayangkoon (Executive Editor), Faculty of Engineering, THAMMASAT UNIVERSITY, Klong-Luang, Pathumtani, 12120, THAILAND. Tel: +66-2-5643005 Ext 3101. Fax: +66-2-5643022 DrBoonsap @ gmail.com Managing Office TUENGR Group, 88/244 Moo 3, Moo Baan Saransiri, Klong#2, KlongLuang, Pathumtani, 12120, THAILAND. Tel/WhatsApp: +66-995535450.

Postal Paid in MALAYSIA/THAILAND.

ii

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11A

THE SELF-CONCEPT LEVEL IN THE MODIFIED AL-MADINAH PROGRAM FOR TALENTED STUDENTS IN SAUDI ARABIA Sultan Alsharari a

a*

a

, Aznan Che Ahmad , and Saleh Aljohani

a

School of Education, Universiti Sains Malaysia, MALAYSIA

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 29 April 2019 Received in revised form 08 July 2019 Accepted 26 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

This study aims to improve the self-concept and motivation of talented students in Saudi Arabia by investigating the modified Al-Madinah program for gifted students in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. A pilot study was conducted to administer the pre-test and post-test instruments and the application of the program. The students are divided into two groups. The first group is the experimental group, whereas the second group is the control group. The fourth phase of the study involves the administration of the pre-test instruments (the self-concept test) in a quiet environment. Then, the two-way ANOVA test was conducted to investigate the impact of the modified Al-Madinah program. The findings concluded that there is a significant difference between the self-concept of the experimental group compared to that of the control group of the talented students after the intervention using the modified Al-Madinah program.

Keywords: Gifted Student; Gifted Study Program; Giftedness classroom; Self-concept learning; Classroom observation.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION The main purpose of this study is developing a Modified version of Al Madinah program for talented students in Saudi Arabia. In order to achieve this general purpose of the study. The main purpose of this study is to develop a modified version of Al-Madinah program for talented students in Saudi Arabia to achieve the objectives of the study. The educational systems all over the world have witnessed remarkable and impressive modifications, which conform to the ever-changing world. As a result of these rapid and noticeable changes, the goals of the educational systems were affected.

Taking these issues into account, it has been argued that the basic goal of school education is to provide students with effective instruction in order to help them develop important and required thinking and learning skills so that they can be active members in their societies and to enable them to overcome the difficulties that they have encountered in their environments, especially in their life outside schools. *Corresponding author (Sultan Alsharari). Tel: +966 50 787 5545. E-mail: sultano2008@hotmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11A http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11A.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.136

1

Al-Madinah program involves modern theories in the fields of education and gifted students, which were established and developed by Abdeen and Ghani (2016). There are three significant aspects on which the Al-Madinah program was established. These three aspects are cognitive processes, program strategies, and sentimental processes. Three essential elements are 1) motivation, 2) trust in self-abilities and self-concept, and 3) patience. The implementation of Al-Madinah program strategies is carried out through some specific activities for the purpose of enhancing gifted students’ creative thinking skills.

It is quite essential to look after gifted students because this will assist them to build their abilities and to prepare them for coping with challenges that they might encounter in their life. Furthermore, one of the advantages of paying attention to the development of gifted students’ attitudes and aptitudes involves enabling those students to utilize their abilities and talents. In comparison with the value of other resources and the national human wealth in any society, gifted students embody a significant human resource that can be equivalent to anything. In addition, Snow (1986) argued that investment and development in gifted students are crucial for both individuals and society, in general, and in any society that is very much concerned about advancement and development. Ghaffari and Azizi (2018) used architectural design to help and increase student learning with creative.

The interaction among students should be viewed as an important criterion for successful learning because such an interaction can have a remarkable impact on students’ learning, and it can also assist them in specific skills. These skills include self-discipline, responsibility, self-confidence, and self-concept reinforcement (Bear, 2010). Moreover, this interaction can be the springboard for developing styles related to work-group cooperation styles and help them in respecting opinions and considering people’s feelings. Self-concept is a term, which is used to refer to the image that people create of themselves. It comprises a set of features or attributes that we use to identify ourselves as individuals and differentiate ourselves from others. As argued by Jabeen and Ahmed (2013), people are not born with self-concept.

2. EDUCATION SYSTEM IN SAUDI ARABIA The Ministry of Education in Saudi Arabia was established in 1958. Based on what has been reported in books on education in the Kingdom, educating girls formally started in 1960 by constructing 15 primary schools exclusively for girls. Later, in 1963, the growth of the educational system was embodied in the inauguration of 72 intermediate and secondary schools, seven vocational schools, and seven teacher-training institutes. In addition, during the same year, the first intermediate girls’ school was opened. Furthermore, for secondary education, the first school for girls was founded in 1965. The expansion of education continued to reach about 2225 schools and institutes in 1965, compared to only 1114 in 1964.

The period from 1975 to 1985 is viewed to be a period that has witnessed a remarkable positive period when there was a noticeable expansion of education in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The focus was on providing the education sector with more financial support. This was viewed as a matter of investment by the government that was initiated in order to develop the whole educational system and to assist the educational field by increasing the number of teachers and various administrative staff (Madini, 2005). Currently, the public education sector of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia includes

2

Sultan Alsharari, Aznan Che Ahmad, and Saleh Aljohani

19 universities and more than 29,000 schools. The country has also witnessed a very remarkable increase in the number of colleges and other training and educational institutions.

Al-Nafea et al. (1992) pointed out that although the Saudi government felt the necessity to approach talented students for the first time in 1969. However, no real action was taken to accomplish this vision. The period between 1990 and 1996 witnessed a great step taken by King Abdul Aziz’s City of Science and Technology in cooperation with the MOE and the General Presidency for Girls’ Education through submitting a project for comprehensive national research.

Bondagjy (2000) stated that the “Identification and Care for Gifted Students” is the title of the project, which is expected to achieve three aims. The first aim is to design a program for recognizing gifted students. The second aim is to create models of an enrichment program for Mathematics and Science curricula. The third aim is to provide the Saudi society with an intellectual or spiritual understanding of the importance of the identification of gifted pupils and provide them with proper education that can meet their educational needs.

3. METHODOLOGY This study focuses on the development of the Modified Al-Madinah Program. Moreover, it presents, in detail, various issues of planning and organization of the Modified Al-Madinah Program.

The aim of discussing the aspects of planning and organization of the Modified Al-Madinah Program is to pave the way for highlighting the feasibility of implementing this program.

Modern theories in the field of education and talented students are the basis of the Al-Madinah Program. Specifically, there are three significant aspects on which the Al-Madinah Program was established. These three aspects are cognitive processes, program strategies, and sentimental processes. Three essential elements are 1) motivation, 2) trust in self-abilities and self-concept, and 3) patience. The implementation of the MAL-MadinahP strategies is carried out through several specific activities for the purpose of enhancing talented students’ motivation and skills of self-concept skills (Abdeen & Ghani, 2016).

In this study, the chosen research design is the non-equivalent (pretest and posttest) control-group design. The non-equivalent group design (control-group design) is probably the most frequently used design in both educational and social research. Although this type of research design is structured like a pretest-posttest randomized experiment, it lacks the most important feature of random assignment of respondents. The research design of this study is employed to examine the impact of a specific independent variable(s) on the dependent variables. ‘O’ is used to represent the dependent variables, whereas pretest and post-tests are used in the experimental and control groups.

The quasi-experimental research design is used in this study to examine the impact of the modules of a training program on the improvement of students’ self-concept and motivation among gifted students in Saudi Arabia.

This study, the instrument for data collection was modified from Piers-Harris (2002), in order to be appropriate for the Arabic culture. Among the scales that are widely used for the measurement of self-conception, Piers-Harris 2 Self-Concept Scale is the most common instrument for measuring self-conception. Based on using Piers-Harris 2 instrument and the findings that were obtained by this *Corresponding author (Sultan Alsharari). Tel: +966 50 787 5545. E-mail: sultano2008@hotmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11A http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11A.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.136

3

instrument, the researcher validated the results using other quantitative data obtained by using other psychological tests or qualitative data such as clinical interviews with the students and other informants, prior history, school records, and classroom observations. Also, researchers that prefer to use this instrument may need to talk with outside consultants and refer to reliable sources as needed.

4. RESULTS OF ANALYSIS In order to achieve the objectives of this study, the study will use the SPSS program version 16.

The descriptive analysis will be used to investigate the pre-tests results of self-concept and motivation for Saudi Arabian talented student. Moreover, the descriptive analysis will be used to investigate the post-test of self-concept and motivation for Saudi Arabian talented student. In addition, the reliability coefficient method will be used to compare the results in pre and post-tests, whereas, the two-way ANOVA analysis will be used. An examination by t-test of differences between groups generally will also be used, the method of analysis is illustrated in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Schematic study and analysis.

A two-way ANOVA test was used in this study and based on this test, a comparison between the self-concept pre-test and post-test was conducted. The results of this test are illustrated in Table ‎1 and shown in Figure ‎2. Table ‎1 shows that there are 40 participants in both groups, experiment group (N=40) and control group (N=40). In the post-test, the motivation mean value of the experimental group was -0.75 with standard deviation 0.15 while the control group scored mean value of motivation was -0.07 with standard deviation 0.26. Levene’s test of equality of error variances showed that the variances of both groups were not equal F(1.78)=10.19 and p-value (Sig.) <0.01. The difference between groups in motivation scores was found as a significant difference (F=2.3.144 and p-value<0.01).

4

Sultan Alsharari, Aznan Che Ahmad, and Saleh Aljohani

Table 1: ANOVA Test to Compare the Self-Concept Scores in the Pre-Test and Post-Test Group

N

Mean

Experiment Control Total

40 40 80

.0732 .0053 .0393

Std. Error of the Mean (SEM) .055 .055 -

Levene's Test of Equality of Error Variances F df1 df2 Sig. 5.132 1 78 0.026

SD 0.284 0.403 0.348

Figure 2: The Difference between Self-Concept Pre-Test and Post-Test.

As shown in Table ‎2, both of the groups have 40 participants and the scored mean value of the self-concept of the experimental group was 0.63 with standard deviation 0.21 and for the control group was 0.54 with standard deviation 0.28. The T-Test for Equality of Means showed that there was a significant differences between the mean of both groups F(78)=2.51, t=1.73, and p-value<0.05. The results of this test are illustrated in Table 2‎. The final results show that Modified Al Madinah Program effects positively on the experimental group of students and the changes in the program is accepted.

Table 2: The Independent Sample Test of Self-Concept Group

N

Mean

SD

Experiment Control

40 40

0.63 0.54

0.21 0.28

F 2.511

T-Test for Equality of Means Mean Diff. df t .097

78

1.732

Sig. .047

5. CONCLUSION The study concluded that, at 95% significant level, the modified Al-Madinah program has a positive impact on gifted students in Saudi Arabia. The findings showed that the minimal difference between the self-concept scores of the experimental and control groups in accordance with their demographics (age, birth order, and grade) and revealed that the modified Al-Madinah program did not affect self-concept and demographic characteristics (age, birth order, and grade) of talented students. However, it was found that there is a significant difference between the self-concept of the experimental and control groups of talented students after the intervention using the modified Al-Madinah program. *Corresponding author (Sultan Alsharari). Tel: +966 50 787 5545. E-mail: sultano2008@hotmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11A http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11A.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.136

5

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data used or generated from this study is available upon request to the corresponding author.

7. REFERENCES Abdeen, S. A., & Ghani, M. Z. (2016). Talented students’ programs in Jordan: reality and expectations. Journal of Research in Social Sciences, 6(3), 500-506.

Al-Nafea, A., Alkatay, A., & Aleslim, A. (1992). A Programme to Identify Gifted and Detection. The fourth periodic report of the draft program of detection and care for gifted. Regional Scientific Conference for Giftedness. 26.

Bear, G. G. (2010). School discipline and self-discipline: A practical guide to promoting prosocial student behavior. Guilford Press.

Bondagjy, M. (2000). The differentiation of the mathematics curriculum for mathematically able pupils in primary school. Unpublished doctoral dissertation. The University of Newcastle.

Ghaffari, A., & Azizi, S. (2018). Design criteria of children's scientific-research center formulation (student research-center). International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies, 9(4), 297-305.

Jabeen, S., & Ahmed Khan, M. (2013). A study of creative thinking abilities and self-concept of high and low achievers. Unique Journal of Educational Research. Vol.1(1).

Madini, M. I. (2005). An investigation into female kindergarten teachers' stress in Saudi Arabia.

Doctoral dissertation, University of East Anglia.

Piers, E. V., & Herzberg, D. S. (2002). Piers-Harris 2: Piers-Harris children's self-concept scale.

Western Psychological Services.

Snow, R. E. (1986). Individual differences and the design of educational programs. American Psychologist, 41(10), 1029.

Sultan Alsharari is a Ph.D. Candidate at Universiti Sains Malaysia. His bachelor study was in Doctrine, Faculty of Education, King Saud University, Saudi Arabia. He obtained his Master’s degree from Princess Alia University College, Al-Balqa’ Applied University, Jordan. His research focuses on Talent and Creativity, and he is an Accredited Trainer in Administrative Innovation and Leadership Development.

Dr.Aznan Che Ahmad is an Associate Professor and Head of Department for Special Education, School of Educational Studies, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Penang. He completed Diploma in Teaching Visually Impaired Students, Bachelor’s, Master’s and PhD degrees in Special Education, Certificate in Teaching Deaf-Blind, and Certificate in Expressive Art Therapy. His researches focus on Special education, Pre-School, Early Childhood, Remedial Education.

Dr. Saleh Aljohani got his Ph.D. from Universiti Sains Malaysia. He is an Accredited Trainer in Administrative Innovation and Leadership Development. His research focusses on Talent and Creativity.

6

Sultan Alsharari, Aznan Che Ahmad, and Saleh Aljohani

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11B

LONGITUDINAL FLOW OF A CONICAL DEFLECTOR WITH A STREAM OF VISCOUS INCOMPRESSIBLE LIQUID Alexander I. Esin a*, Dmitry A. Solovyev a, Galina N. Kamyshova a, Larisa A. Zhuravleva a, Dmitry G. Goryunov a a

Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, RUSSIA

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history Received 01 May 2019 Received in revised form 09 July 2019 Accepted 25 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

This article deals with a longitudinal jet axisymmetric flow around a conical deflector by an averaged turbulent flow of an incompressible fluid. An equation is given to determine the thickness of a water film that comes down from the deflector, and depends on the work of friction forces and kineticity of the incident flow. The distance of departure of the jet (radius of the deflector) and comparison with the experiment is given.

Keywords: Jet flow; Conical nozzle; Water film thickness; Correction factor; Friction forces; Froude number; Trajectory; Jet departure distance.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION The longitudinal axisymmetric flow around a turbulent jet of a conical deflector is so complicated that at present. It is not possible to describe this process not only on the basis of the differential Navier – Stokes equations but also using the averaged Reynolds equations [1]. Wrapping conical deflectors is of great practical importance in the design of short-jet sprinkler heads. The flow of the fluid flowing around the conical deflector takes a fairly stable close to the conical shape of the film. It remains at some distance from the vanishing point of the surface of the deflector. After this, it loses stability and is broken up into separate drops. According to the experiments [2, 3], the disintegration of the jet begins from the peripheral part. Therefore, droplets forming in the central zone of the jet have the greatest range. The point of their fall is the point of maximum departure of the jet. The concept of “jet path” in this case refers to any axial section of an axisymmetric flow, with theassumption that the transverse dimensions of the compact part of the liquid film are small compared with the range and height of departure. In fact, it is believed that all the liquid moves along a single trajectory connecting the center of the living section of the film and the point of maximum departure, and is the envelope of the trajectories of all the droplets of the jet [2]. In the axisymmetric *Corresponding author (Alexander I. Esin). E-mail: esinai@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.9 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11B http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11B.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.129

1

case, the transverse dimensions of the compact part of a liquid film are uniquely determined by the thickness of the film that comes down from the deflector. Historically, the determination of the film thickness, as well as force interaction between the fluid and the deflector, is calculated without taking the friction forces into account [2-6]. In [7] it was established (Figure 1) that thickness of the film on the deflector depends on the full hydraulic drag coefficient ζ (zeta), and Froude numbers of the incoming flow: 𝑟

𝑟2

𝑟2

0 𝛿 = − cosβ + √cos2 β + 𝑘0 cosβ

(1),

where r, r0, β ‒ geometrical parameters of the deflector pair (nozzle - deflector), 𝑘0 = √

𝛼1 +𝜁 𝛼0 −

2 𝐹𝑟0

‒ correction factor that takes into account the work of friction forces and the 𝑉2

kineicity of the incident flow, α0, α1 ‒ Coriolis coefficients, 𝐹𝑟0 = 𝑔𝑧0 ‒ Froude number.

0

Figure 1: Scheme of jet flow around a conical deflector.

The average velocities in the calculated living sections 0‒0 and 1‒1 are related by: 𝑉0 = 𝑘0 𝑉1

(2).

From Equation (1), it is inferred that the coefficient 𝑘0 can be determined empirically by the known geometrical parameters of the deflector pair and the film thickness.

Consider the trajectory and the departure length of the jet L (range nozzle). Neglecting the wind speed, let us imagine that the origin of coordinates is placed in the center of gravity of the living section 1 - 1 (see Figure 1). The distance from the center of gravity of the living section 1 - 1 to the

2

Alexander I. Esin, Dmitry A. Solovyev, Galina N. Kamyshova, Larisa A. Zhuravleva, Dmitry G. Goryunov

𝑧нас + 0.5δcosα.

surface of the earth will be

Insofar as 𝑧нас >> 0.5δcosα, then we will later consider only 𝑧нас ‒ deflector installation height.

With axisymmetric fluid motion in the deflector for any axial flow section in the absence of air resistance, the jet trajectory equation can be written as [8]: 𝑔

𝑧 = 𝑥𝑡𝑔𝛼 − 2𝑉 2 cos2 α 𝑥 2 .

1

Excluding speed 𝑉1 using equation (2), we get: 𝑔

𝑧 = 𝑥𝑡𝑔𝛼 − 𝑘02 2𝑉 2 cos2 α 𝑥 2 .

0

For cylindrical nozzle speed 𝑉0 can be represented by [8]: 𝑉0 = 𝜇√2𝑔𝐻,

where μ is the coefficient of speed (consumption) nozzle; Н is head in front of the nozzle.

Then the jet trajectory equation takes as 𝑘2

0 2 𝑧 = 𝑥𝑡𝑔𝛼 − 4μ2 𝐻cos 2α 𝑥 .

Energy loss to overcome air resistance when α < π/4 approximately equal to [8]: 𝑙

ℎ𝑓 ≈ 𝜆 4𝑅

1

𝑉12

𝜆

= 𝑘 2 4𝑅 2𝑔 0

𝑥

1 cos𝛼

2𝑔𝜇2 𝐻 2𝑔

𝜇2

= 𝜆 4𝑘 2 𝑅

𝐻𝑥

1 cos𝛼

,

where λ is drag coefficient; 𝑅1 is the hydraulic radius of section 1 - 1. Then, the final view of the jet’s trajectory is written as: 𝑧 = 𝑥𝑡𝑔𝛼 −

𝑘02 𝑥 2 2

𝑘 4μ2 𝐻(1− 02

𝐾 𝑥)cos2 α 4𝜇 𝐻cos𝛼

(3),

𝜇4 𝐻

where 𝐾 = 𝜆 𝑘 4 𝑅 is dimensionless parameter depending, in general, on r0, r1, α, δ, H, and 0

1

resistance in the deflector and air.

From Equation (3) with z =−𝑧нас , the radius 𝐿 of the action nozzle can be determined from −𝑧нас = 𝐿𝑡𝑔𝛼 −

𝑘02 𝐿2 2 𝑘 𝐾 4μ2 𝐻(1− 02 𝐿)cos2 α 4𝜇 𝐻cos𝛼

*Corresponding author (Alexander I. Esin). E-mail: esinai@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.9 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11B http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11B.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.129

(4).

3

The solution of the quadratic equation (4) has the following form [9]: 𝐿 = 𝐿0 cos𝛼,

𝐿0 = 𝑧нас

𝑎=

𝑘02 𝑧нас 4𝜇2 𝐻

√(𝑎𝐾−sin𝛼)2 +4𝑎(1+𝐾sin𝛼)−𝑎𝐾+sin𝛼 2𝑎(1+𝐾sin𝛼)

,

(5)

.

Hydraulic radius R1 living section 1 - 1, which is a truncated cone with a generator δ (see Figure 1) is approximately equal to δ. Thus, the parameter 𝐾 takes the form 𝜇4 𝐻

𝐾 = 𝜆 𝑘4 𝛿 0

(6).

Friction coefficient 𝜆, included in parameter (6), can be determined from the experimental data of A.I. Didebulidze [2].

According to calculations [7], the correction factor 𝐾0 is very weakly dependent on the Froude number 𝐹𝑟0 . Therefore, we further neglect the distance 𝑧0 (see Figure 1) and the Froude number.

The maximum value of 𝐿 (the range of the nozzle), which depends on the angle 𝛼, can be found numerically [10] using the algorithm (1), (5), (6), without solving the cumbersome extremum problem. Figure 2 shows a graph of dependence (4) according to [7, 11]: Q = 0.957 l/sec; Н = 10 м; d0 = 10 мм; d = 50 мм; μ = 0.87; zнас = 2.0 м

(7),

which shows that the maximum length of departure of the jet (range nozzle) 𝐿max = 6.165 м is achieved when β = 67, see Figure 2.

Figure 2: Determination of the range of action nozzle.

The calculation of the trajectories of the hydraulic jets according to equation (3) with the data (7) for different values of the deflection angle is presented in Figure 3.

4

Alexander I. Esin, Dmitry A. Solovyev, Galina N. Kamyshova, Larisa A. Zhuravleva, Dmitry G. Goryunov

Figure 3: The trajectory of the hydraulic jets at different values of the angle of taper: 1 ‒ β = 70; 2 ‒ β = 67; 3 ‒ β = 60; 4 ‒ β = 50; 5 ‒ β = 45.

Using the algorithms (1), (5), and (6), it is possible to construct a theoretical dependence of the range of the nozzle on the head in front of the nozzle for different values of the nozzle diameter (Figure 4). Experimental confirmation of the curves in Figure 5 can be found in the work of N.F. Ryzhko [12].

Figure 4: Nozzle range at installation height 2 м.

An empirical formula to determine the radius of action of a conical nozzle installed at a height of 2 м from the soil surface is also proposed there: 𝐿=

𝐻 0.728+0.942

𝐻 𝑑0

*Corresponding author (Alexander I. Esin). E-mail: esinai@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.9 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11B http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11B.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.129

(8),

5

where 𝐻 ‒ head before nozzle in м, 𝑑0 ‒ nozzle diameter in мм.

In Figure 5, there is a graph that compares the values of the nozzle range, calculated theoretically by the algorithm (1), (5), (6), as well as the empirical formula N.F. Ryzhko (8). Obviously, it is an enough good coincidence of the two dependencies.

Considering the specific features of conducting field experiments with operating sprinkler machines, the above studies allow us to conclude that some parts of the field tests can be replaced by computational experiments on appropriate models [10, 13].

Figure 5: Comparison of the calculated and experimental values of the nozzle range according to (7): ♦ - theoretical calculation; ■ - empirical formula (8) Simulations of this kind [10] have been successfully used in various areas of the water sector, e.g. in water supply [14], and in hydraulic engineering [15-16].

2. CONCLUSION This work focuses on a longitudinal jet axisymmetric flow around a conical deflector by an averaged turbulent flow of an incompressible fluid. The mathematical models are discussed to determine the thickness of a water film that comes down from the deflector, and depends on the work of friction forces and kineticity of the incident flow. The distance of departure of the jet (radius of the deflector) and comparison with the experiment is also discussed.

3. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data used or generated from this study can be requested to the corresponding author.

4. REFERENCES [1] Loitsyansky L.G. Fluid and gas mechanics / L.G. Loitsyansky. - M .: Drofa, 2003. - 840 p.

[2] Isaev, A.P. Hydraulics sprinkler machines / A.P. Isaev. - M .: "Mechanical Engineering", 1973. - 216 p.

[3] Lebedev, B. M. Sprinkling machines: theory and design / B. M. Lebedev. - M .: Mashinostroenie, 1977. - 246 p.

[4] Borodin, V.A. Spraying a liquid / V.A. Borodin. - M .: Mashinostroenie, 1967. - 263 p.

6

Alexander I. Esin, Dmitry A. Solovyev, Galina N. Kamyshova, Larisa A. Zhuravleva, Dmitry G. Goryunov

[5] Bashta, T.M. Hydraulics, hydraulic machines, and hydraulic drives / TM. Bashta et al. - M .: Mechanical Engineering, 1982. - 423 p.

[6] Pilgunov, V.N. Verification of mathematical models of typical local hydraulic resistances [Electronic resource] / VN Pilgunov, K.D. Efremova // Engineering Bulletin. - 2013. - № 11. - P. 29 - 56. - Access mode: http://engsi.ru/issue/622075.html.

[7] Esin, A.I. Flow around a conical deflector with a flow of a viscous incompressible fluid / A.I. Esin, A.V. Rusinov, A.P. Akpasov, Yu.V. Bondarenko, L.A. Zhuravleva // Scientific life ”. - 2018. - № 4. S. 14 -19.

[8] Shterenlicht, D.V. Hydraulics / DV Shterenlicht. - M .: Koloss, 2004. - 656 p.

[9] Korn G. Mathematics Handbook for Scientists and Engineers / G. Korn, T. Korn. - M .: Science, 1973.

- 832 p.

[10] Esin A.I. Numerical hydraulics. Monograph / A.I. Esin. - Saratov: Publishing House Sarat. agrarian University, 2013. - 160 p.

[11] Akpasov A.P. Improving the design of deflector nozzles to increase the uniformity of irrigation / A.P. Akpasov // "Problems and prospects for the development of land reclamation in modern [12] Ryzhko N.F. Improvement of rain-forming devices for multi-support sprinkler machines.

Monograph / N.F. Ryzhko. - Saratov: Saratov State Agrarian University, 2009. - 176 p.

[13] Esin A.I. Mathematical modeling of a water-conducting belt of irrigation machines / A.I. Esin, D.A. Soloviev, L.A. Zhuravlev // "Scientific Life". - 2017. - № 9. P. 20 -28.

[14] Esin A.I. Mathematical modeling of the increase in the roughness of pressure pipelines under conditions of long-term operation / A.I. Esin, T.N. Southkin. // Mathematical methods in engineering and technology - MMTT. - 2014. - № 8 (67). Pp. 31-34.

[15] Esin A.I. Mathematical modeling of the spillway construction according to the scheme of discharge from under the shield / A.I. Esin // Environmental Management. - 2011. - № 5. P. 83-86.

[16] Esin A.I. Mathematical modeling of the distribution of impurities in irrigation and drainage channels / A.I. Esin, M.P. Gorbachev // Mathematical methods in engineering and technology MMTT. - 2014. - № 8 (67). Pp. 31-34. No. 7-1 (66). Pp. 29-33.

Professor Dr. Alexander I. Esin is Professor at the Department of Technosphere Safety and Transport and Technological Machines, Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, Russia. He holds a Doctor of Technical Sciences. His scientific research directions are Fluid and Gas Mechanics, Open Flow Hydrodynamics, Mathematical Modeling in Hydraulics and Land Reclamation.

Dr.Dmitry A. Solovyev is Head of the Department of Technosphere Safety and Transport and Technological Machines, Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, Russia. He earned a Doctor of Technical Sciences degree.

His directions of scientific research are Land Reclamation Machines, Irrigation Systems.

Dr.Galina N. Kamyshova is Head of the Department of Mathematics, Mechanics and Engineering Graphics, Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, Russia. She has a PhD degree in Mathematics.

Her main area of expertise is Mathematical Modeling and Data Analysis in Management and Environmental Engineering.

Dr.Larisa Zhuravleva is an Associate Professor at the Department of Technosphere Safety and Transport and Technological Machines", Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, Russia.

She holds a Doctor of Technical Sciences degree. Her areas of research are Machines and Equipment for Environmental Engineering, Technology and Technical Means of irrigation.

Goryunov Dmitry Gennadievich is an Associate Professor at the Department of Technosphere Safety and Transport Technological Machines, Saratov State Agrarian University named after N.I. Vavilov, Russia. He is a Candidate of Technical Sciences. His research areas include Optimization of the Fleet; Construction and Maintenance Work on Irrigation Systems, Fire Ponds. *Corresponding author (Alexander I. Esin). E-mail: esinai@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.9 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11B http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11B.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.129

7

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11C

A QUALITY OF URBAN DESIGN ELEMENTS IN FISHING VILLAGE AT TELUK KUMBAR, PENANG Abdul Munir Najmuddin a*, Mohammad Firas Azmi a, Ahmad Sanusi Hassan a, Muhammad Hafeez Abdul Nasir a*, Boonsap Witchayangkoon b a b

School of Housing, Building & Planning, Universiti Sains Malaysia, MALAYSIA Department of Civil Engineering, Thammasat School of Engineering, Thammasat University, THAILAND. ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 14 April 2019 Received in revised form 05 July 2019 Accepted 18 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

This study discusses and identifies the urban design elements in the fishing village in Teluk Kumbar, Pulau Pinang. The study area has its attraction of urban seafront elements. The area, however, is having a threat from urban development that will degrade the existing landscape of fisherman settlement. This study applies a qualitative method in analyzing urban design elements of Kampung Nelayan (Fishing Village) Teluk Kumbar and Kampung (Village) Paya Teluk Kumbar. The data was taken from fieldwork survey conducted in the area. Some data obtained directly from the location include interviews with the local residents. The layout setting of the Kampung Nelayan Teluk Kumbar and Kampung Paya Teluk Kumbar was influenced by local people’s needs and daily fishing activities. The geographical location of the two villages has a relationship with every aspect of the economy and its urban design. The study shows that the layout plan of Kampung Nelayan Teluk Kumbar and Kampung Paya Teluk Kumbar is influenced by the dominant sea line, which is the urban design element of edge. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

Keywords: Kevin Lynch; Seaside settlement; Seaside landscape; Mental mapping; Seaside layout plan; Coastal architecture configuration.

1. INTRODUCTION The objective of this paper is to identify in quality of urban design elements in Teluk Kumbar Fishing Village. Teluk Kumbar is one of tourist attraction in Penang. The purpose of this study is to identify the quality of urban design elements in the area. Five elements of urban design are incorporated in creating the layout plan of the fishing village, which are, nodes, paths, districts, edges, and landmarks. Each element has a particular function and helps people to have better experience in the area. The significance of these urban design elements toward the village itself. The usage of figure-ground plan to guide the mental mapping’s study of the village help to identify the urban design elements (Trancik, 1986). Teluk Kumbar Fishing Village is chosen as the case study due to its unique environment with a traditional settlement pattern with urban hierarchy. This paper will further discuss *Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

1

how the quality of the urban design elements can affect and influence the fishing village's layout.

The case study will be analyzed with urban design elements namely path, edge, node, district and landmark (Lynch, 1960). Due to urban expansion, this rural-urban fringe faces both urban and rural land-use problems that result in traffic jams, environmental pollution, and low quality of life (Yan, Hao & Xia, 2010). Urban elements are playing a crucial role in designing a layout of a city where it influences the movement in a city (Mohamed Pauzi, Hassan, Arab & Abdul Samad, 2018). A good layout plan will help the user to be more direct and precise whenever they are moving toward a destination (Mohd Yasin, Hassan & Al-Ashwal, 2017).

2. CASE STUDY Located on the south of the island of Penang, Teluk Kumbar is a district or small bay located near to Penang International Airport (Figure 1). The settlements were founded in the late 18th century by two Malay explorers who were Nakhoda Sedin and Panglima Long. This agricultural town was one of the autonomous early Malay settlements during that time. Not until the late 20th century, the community there depended on rice farming or agriculture and fishing in the sea as the main economic activities (Ghazali, 2011). By the time in the 1990s, the development of Teluk Kumbar was selected and initiated by the Penang Regional Development Authority (PERDA), to be developed from rural areas to a new township.

Figure 1: Key Plan (Penang, Malaysia)

Figure 2: Location Plan

According to Department of Statistics Malaysia (2010), Teluk Kumbar comprises of 1,084 population with Malays formed more than three-quarter of the total population, while the Chinese are made up the balance of the population. The selected area is located along the Gertak Sanggul Road

2

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

and Teluk Kumbar Road. It comprises of two villages, Kampung Nelayan Teluk Kumbar and Kampung Paya Teluk Kumbar (Figure 2 & 3). The community who live in the study area are mostly fishermen. Thus, most of their work and source of income is related to the sea (Teluk Kumbar, 2019 & Ghazali, 2011). The area has its unique seafront attraction. It is currently a threat to from the urban development that will perish many existing and historic buildings. Currently, these two villages are surrounded by a newly constructed township. As a result of city development around it, and recently a threat from reclaimed the human-made islands by the state government which is to be relocated not far from this village.

In general, fisherman village has family-trust and characteristic within its geographical site (coastal area) or from its people activities that are most familiar or native to the sea. Thus, it gives the local community an identity which categorizes as a characteristic of the area which transforms the building massing and urban development.

Figure 3: Site Plan. *Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

3

3. METHODOLOGY This research applies the qualitative descriptive method to study and analyze the existing urban elements in Kampung Nelayan Teluk Kumbar and Kampung Paya Teluk Kumbar. A drawing in Figure 3 was redrawn by using AutoCAD for the mental mapping analysis. Data was also obtained directly from the site, including interviews with the community and local people on 11th April 2019.

This method was selected was because it can identify in detail and recognize the urban design elements and how the fishermen arranged the layout of villages identifiable from their mental mapping. This study focuses on two types of the survey and analysis to collect data and to understand basic urban design elements within Villages in Teluk Kumbar.

4. ANALYZED RESULTS 4.1 PATHS

The area at the western part of Teluk Kumbar

The area at the eastern part of Teluk Kumbar

Figure 4: Primary Access from Bayan Lepas to Teluk Kumbar The element to be analyzed is the path (Figures 4 & 5). The main entrance is coming from Bayan Lepas, which is Jalan Teluk Kumbar, the only access to Teluk Kumbar for both locals and tourist.

The road is the only path for people to go in or go out of the villages. As the place has rapid

4

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

development, most of the locals will use the road to go to their office out in the town while tourist will come through the path to enjoy the villages itself. Before this, the road is very congested especially during the peak hour, but after the completion of the federal highway and the flyover connecting Teluk Kumbar and Penang International Airport back in Dec 2017, its congestion issue is greatly reduced.

Figure 5: Paths’ diagram in the studied area.

Continuing from the Jalan Teluk Kumbar is the collector road that is highlighted with the colour of darker orange, which is Jalan Gertak Sanggul which moves toward the western part of the area.

This road has a width of 7 meters which fit two way of lanes for vehicles and has a distance of approximately around 750m which is from the junction of the arterial road and the river. Connecting the collector road is the local roads which majorly occupy the road hierarchy here in Teluk Kumbar.

They are highlighted with the colour of lighter orange where it provides mean of access to the local houses in the area. This road has a width of 2.5-3 meters where most of the local road is unpaved and can only fit one car at a time. The road highlighted with yellow colour is a pedestrian and motorway, which is less than 1.2 meter. They are unpaved and sandy. This road provides a connection between the local road and the houses located in the Kampung Teluk Kumbar.

4.2 EDGES The second element is the edge. Dermaga Teluk Kumbar (Figure 6) is connected with a river which divides the area to 2 parts. Edge 1, which is the sea lines, are considered as the edges or the *Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

5

boundaries for the villages. The sea line which connected to the second edge, the river line divides the western and eastern part of Teluk Kumbar. These two edges helped to distinguish between the boundary line of the land and differentiated the land area for each section. Edge 3 is the forest line where it limits and creates the area of each village. Finally, Edge 4 helps to distinguish between 2 types of building where the boundary between traditional and modern buildings is created.

The gulf shape of the edge of the sea line creates a more private settlement for the village, especially in the western part of the area, which is the Chinese village. It affects the arrangement of the houses in the layout of the village-owned by fishers. So, the houses are built near to the seaside.

The beachfront is sandy and can be accessed by visitors. This place has good scenery suitable for a photo session for a wedding and many more. On top of that, connecting the sea-line of the gulf shape area, the sea line is straight, and a bit curvy suitable for boat parking. It makes much easier for the fishermen to go to the sea.

Figure 7.1. The edges of Dermaga Teluk Kumbar and the village.

Figure 6: The edges of Teluk Kumbar Villages.

4.3 DISTRICT The next element in line is the district (Figure 7). District 1 is a residential and settlement area, which is the primary district for the locals living in the Kampung Teluk Kumbar. Traditional Architecture with timber houses is scattered around in this district. The Malays are staying in the eastern area of the district while the Chinese are in the western area of the district. Most of the residents run their business directly from home. District 2 is also a residential area, but with Modern Architecture where concrete houses, medium-rises, and high rises are built here. While District 3 is the amenities and facilities which comprises of Police Station, Mini Markets, and Workshops. Next

6

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

is District 4, the coastal area where the fishermen use this area prepare their boats before going out to the sea. The boats are parked at the coastline. District 5 is a greeneries zone where trees and forests reside in the area.

Figure 7: The districts at Teluk Kumbar.

4.4 NODES Six nodes (Figure 8) are identified during the site visit, which is node 1 is the Chinese Temple, which is located next to the seaside. It is a place of gathering during a specified period for worshipping, and the Chinese Community mostly occupies this area. Node 2 is the fisherman jetty where most of the area is reside by the Malay Community, and the Malay fishermen park their boats and keep their fishnets before and after they go for fisheries activities. Although the seaside is a sandy beach, the area is packed with unorganized fisherman boats. This causes the area less attractive, and besides the seawater quality also is not suitable for swimming. The area has many seafood restaurants.

Node 3 has the most popular restaurant in the area, Salwa Mee Udang Restaurant specialized in local pride "prawn/shrimp noodles". Based on the info from local people, the area had numbers of the seafood restaurant. Next is Node 4, Water Sports Training Center of Teluk Kumbar, which is a place providing facilities of the Water Sports Association in the state of Penang. It organizes water sports activities to their members as well as the public. Also, the Water Sports Activity Center is aimed at furthering Penang's water sports activities. Next is Node 5, which is Teluk Kumbar Wet Market.

Regularly this node is crowded with visitors during weekends and crowded with local people going in and out during peak hour in the early morning. Lastly, Node 6 is Sekolah Kebangsaan Telok Kumbar, which will be crowded with parent’s car going in and out during peak hour in early morning and afternoon.

*Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

7

Figure 8: Nodes around the area.

Node 1

Node 4

Node 3 Node 2 Node 5 Figure 9: Hierarchy order of the Nodes.

Node 6

Based on Figures 8 and 9, the studies show that the most prominent nodes are located near to the primary linkage of that area, which is Jalan Teluk Kumbar. Thus, making it easier for accessibility. As it moves further than the primary linkage, the nodes become less important and difficult to access. Overall, the nodes only served for the local people and can be considered as less successful because most of the nodes are does not attract outsider visitors.

8

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

Figure 10. Landmarks around the area.

4.5 LANDMARKS There are two primary landmarks as a point of reference in the area, Figure 10. The primary landmark is located along the main route while the secondary landmark is located off the route visible around the site. Surrounded by new development, the area is kept on developing. Therefore, a new landmark is being built there, the same phenomena as argued by Stern et al. (2013). Landmark 1 is a new observing jetty where it serves as an attraction point to the area. This jetty was built for the fishermen to park their boat, but later its usage was abandoned. Now it is used for sightseeing and a place for fishing. While landmark 2 is a new high-rise hotel and service apartment. Lexis Suites Penang is the most iconic seaside properties in Teluk Kumbar. One of a kind, where it is the only hotel that provides a private pool and steam room in every suite. Next is landmark 3, which is Surau Al-Ikhwan (a small mosque, not used for Friday prayer) located along the Jalan Teluk Kumbar. It is a place of Muslim gathering for worshipping by the Malay Community. Based on the observational study, the jetty is identified as a landmark because of its particular function and length visible from a distance from the seas. The Lexis Suites Penang is also a landmark because of its height visible from far away. The other landmark is a surau (a small mosque) located beside the main road as a centre for Muslim community. All the above landmark does not succeed in term of projecting the grand images of Teluk Kumbar since the outsider does not recognize those landmarks. *Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

9

5. DISCUSSION 5.1 PATH The hierarchy of entrance to the village is affected by the connectivity of the vehicular access, Jalan Teluk Kumbar that comes from Bayan Lepas where it is important as the primary access to the site. The road dimension and amenities influence the role in determining the order of hierarchy in the village. The local roads are the primary path used by the locals and visitors. They, however, lack in the proper standard of the road specification where some of them are unpaved and sandy. The road widths vary which affect the smooth movement of vehicles maneuvering inside the village itself.

5.2 EDGE Edge for the Kampung Teluk Kumbar would be the Dermaga Teluk Kumbar which help to distinguish between the local houses and their primary source of incomes which is the fisheries. It creates a housing layout that revolves around the sea. The second edges, the river line help to create a division between the Malay residents and the Chinese residents. The third edges that can be identified are the forests around the village that separates nature and manmade. Finally, Edge 4 helps to create divisions between 2 type of building where their material and architecture differ to each other.

5.3 DISTRICTS The districts are defined based on their function and the physical element. There are five districts at Kampung Teluk Kumbar which are the traditional settlements, modern settlements, amenities, coastal area, and the greeneries zone. Each district has its function and physical traits that help to distinguish the main activities among the districts. The most noticeable element that can help to differentiate between the districts is the architecture of the houses. The area is mostly occupied by the traditional village in which they are built from timbers.

5.4 NODES The accessibility plays a significant factor in creating a node that attractive and more comfortable to the local people and outside visitor to visit the site. In the studies, we found out that the most prominent nodes are located near to the primary linkage of that area, which, is Jalan Teluk Kumbar.

Thus, making it easier for accessibility. As it moved further than the primary linkage, the nodes become less important and difficult to access. Overall the nodes we found are mostly for the local people and not to attract outsider visitor. Thus, the nodes are unsuccessful.

5.5 LANDMARK While the area is kept on developing, therefore new landmark is being built there. The new landmark being the urban signage and icon of the site. The landmarks became a reference point of the place. Its height, length, and activities can identify a landmark. Thus, in the study, we found out that the landmark does not make successful in term of projecting the image of Teluk Kumbar since the outsider does not recognize those landmarks.

6. CONCLUSION The quality of urban design elements in a fishing village in Teluk Kumbar is a result of influences of the existing housing layout. The cluster of the layout plan is randomly distributed and informal settlement (Hassan, 2010). The main activities of the locals, which is the fisheries, help to focus the

10

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

urban design elements around the village format and create the mental mapping of the area. Edges are the most active elements that help visitors and locals to distinguish the division between the land and sea, the modern building and traditional building as well as man-made structure and nature. It helps to create the layout of the village where the sea line influences the orientation of the village.

The houses are built around the sea line, thus creating activities that revolve along the coastal area.

These edges help to limit the boundary for each district using a physical element or function of each district.

The district is majorly occupied by the residential area, which is the traditional village. This village is occupied by the fishermen, which are the locals living in the area. The districts that coexisted in the area can easily be distinguished between each other due to the noticeable element of the district, which is the architecture. Next, the local road has the highest number existed in the village. The traditional village is mostly designed in a way the houses are very much near to each other. So, the local road helps to connect the collector road to the houses, which are a more private area. There are not much of functional nodes in the area, which can be identified as an element attraction to the village. The increasing number of the traffics and newly introduced development surrounding Teluk Kumbar Village, making it overcrowding and congested at certain times, which mean a proper layout road and zoning should be considered. Besides, the three landmarks, as stated in the study above, not much landmark in the village, can be counted. Although the jetty was built for the fishermen to park their boat, now it already changes its function as a sightseeing platform. Hence, a proper fisherman jetty with enough height should be built to solve this problem.

7. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT We would like to express our sincere appreciation to Universiti Sains Malaysia for a support to this study with a Bridging Grant Number 304.PPBGN.6316521.

8. DATA AVAILABILITY STATEMENT The used or generated data and the result of this study are available upon request to the corresponding author.

9. REFERENCES Department of Statistics Malaysia. (2010). Report of Statistics Malaysia. Putrajaya, Malaysia.

Ghazali, S. (2011). Safeguarding natural and cultural heritage: The experiences of Teluk Bahang fishing communities, Penang, Malaysia. Malaysian Journal of Environmental Management, 12(1), pp.

47-58.

Hassan, A.S. (2010). Fishing Villages: Resemblance of pre-colonial city landscape at the Straits of Malacca in Peninsular Malaysia. The Arab World Geographer, 13 (2), 93-107. Toronto: AWG Publishing.

Lynch, K. (1960). The Image of the City. Boston: MIT Press.

Mohamed Pauzi, M.H., Hassan, A.S., Arab, Y., Abdul Samad, M.H. (2018). A Study on Mental Mapping: Case of Government Buildings, George Town, Penang. International Transaction Journal of Engineering Management & Applied Sciences & Technologies. 9(3). 211-219. *Corresponding authors 1.(Abdul Munir Najmuddin) Tel:+60-124213626, munirnajmuddin@gmail.com. 2.(Mohammad Firas Azmi) Tel:+60-1111778144, firasazmi94@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11C http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11C.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.138

11

Mohd Yasin, N., Hassan, A.S., Al-Ashwal, N.T. (2017). Investigation of Mental Mapping in Urban Design: Case of Queensbay, Penang. International Transaction Journal of Engineering Management & Applied Sciences & Technologies. 8(4). 261-273.

Stern, R.A.M., Fishman, D., Tilove, J. (2013). Paradise Planned: The Garden Suburb and the Modern City. New York: The Monacelli Press.

Teluk Kumbar, Penang. (2019). Retrieved traveltips.com/teluk-kumbar.htm

on 20th April 2019 at

https://www.penang-

Trancik, R. (1986). Finding Lost Space: The Theory of Urban Design. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.

Yan, J., Hao, C., Xia, F. (2010). Toward improved land elements for urban–rural integration: A cell concept of an urban–rural mixed community. Habitat International, Volume 77, July 2018, Pages 110-120.

Mohammad Firas Azmi is a Master’s Degree student at the Universiti Sains Malaysia, Penang, Malaysia. He obtained a Bachelor of Science in Architecture from Universiti Sains Malaysia, Penang, Malaysia. His research encompasses to the Quality of Urban Design Elements in Fishing Village at Teluk Kumbar, Penang.

Abdul Munir Najmuddin is a Master’s degree student at Universiti Sains Malaysia, Penang, Malaysia. He obtained a Bachelor of Science in Architecture from Universiti Sains Malaysia, Penang, Malaysia. His research is about the quality of urban design elements in fishing village at Teluk Kumbar, Penang.

Professor Dr.Ahmad Sanusi Hassan is a Professor in Architecture Programme at the School of Housing, Building and Planning, Universiti Sains Malaysia (USM), Penang, Malaysia. He obtained a Bachelor and Master of Architecture degrees from University of Houston, Texas, USA, and Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) degree from University of Nottingham, United Kingdom. His research focuses on Sustainable Architecture and Urban Design Development for Southeast Asia, history and theory of Architecture, Computer-Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Animation.

Muhammad Hafeez Bin Abdul Nasir is a PhD student at the School of Housing Building and Planning, Universiti Sains Malaysia. He earned a Bachelor of Design Studies and a Master of Architecture degrees from the University of Adelaide, Australia. His research interests are in the fields of Architectural Sciences and Engineering.

Dr.Boonsap Witchayangkoon is an Associate Professor of Department of Civil Engineering at Thammasat University.

He received his B.Eng. from King Mongkut’s University of Technology Thonburi with Honors. He continued his PhD study at University of Maine, USA, where he obtained his PhD in Spatial Information Science & Engineering. Dr. Witchayangkoon current interests involve Applications of Emerging Technologies to Engineering.

12

A.Munir Najmuddin, M.Firas Azmi, A.Sanusi Hassan, M.Hafeez Abdul Nasir, B.Witchayangkoon

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11D

ECOLOGICAL SPIRITUALITY OF SAKHA PEOPLE IN THE CONTEXT OF AN INDIGENOUS APPROACH a

a*

a

Nikolai Dmitrievich Neustroev , Anna Nikolaevna Neustroeva , Alina Alekseevna Kozhurova , a b a Sofia Nikolaevna Shadrina , Alla Dmitrievna Nikolaeva , Venera Petrovna Marfusalova , Aya a a a Petrovna Bugaeva , Tuyaara Alekseevna Shergina , Alexandra Germanovna Larionova , Anatoly b Nikolayevich Chiryaev a

Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of The Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University, Federal State Autonomous Educational Institution of Higher Education, Yakutsk, RUSSIA b Department of Pedagogy, Pedagogical Institute of The Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University, Federal State Autonomous Educational Institution of Higher Education, Yakutsk, RUSSIA ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history Received 01 May 2019 Received in revised form 09 July 2019 Accepted 25 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

This article studies the ecological spirituality of the Sakha people in the context of an indigenous approach. The indigenous methodology study is still at the stage of research and development of the rationale behind it and is not completely recognized by the domestic academic community.

The new indigenous methodology development becomes actual since the previous studies had a political background associated with the colonization of the indigenous Keywords: people and their territories. The growing need for decolonization requires the development of a critically re-considered methodology and new ethno cultural Indigenous nature; approaches revised from the ethical perspective to study the indigenous peoples.

Indigenous peoples; Indigenous originality; The comparison also consider the experience of the historical development of the Russian peoples and ethnic groups, during the colonial of the pre-revolutionary Indigenous tradition; Indigenous knowledge. time, and the process of their unification into a single federal state and a colonial period in the pre-revolutionary time. The research method includes a comparative analysis of the current status of Russian and foreign studies of the indigenous methodology problems. The ecological spirituality of the Sakha people is based on the potential of the primordially indigenous methodology considered through the trinity of the ecology of the inner world as well as the spiritual and cosmic essence of its nature: the ecology of nature, man and soul.

Scientific studies describe the concepts of research categories in a structural order, ranging from ethno-pedagogy to ecological spirituality of the Sakha people. An indigenous approach (the inside approach) is based on the original knowledge of indigenous researchers, with consideration through the prism of the natural ethno-cultural identity of peoples in the process of active national and spiritual revival of the Sakha culture, inspired by the ecological spirituality of the Yakut heroic epos Olonkho and the Teachings of Aiyy ethno cultural education, the creation of a space for scientific interpretation and the demand for the origination of ecological spirituality in the modern technocratic world.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH. *Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

1

1. INTRODUCTION Historical and foreign backgrounds of the indigenous methodology problem require close consideration. Analysis of the studies by such authors as [1], [2], [3, 4] has allowed us to learn the current status of the problem associated with selecting the methodology for indigenous research in the global scientific community, and consider the problems and concerns of the authors working in this sphere. Actualizing indigenous research studies and the need for their introduction into the academic traditions of Western culture has been considered since the 1990s. Over the past 20 years, a number of interesting and informative scientific works have been prepared by representatives of indigenous science in different continents [2]. The concept of indigenous methodology is new to the Russian scientific community since the domestic tradition has developed as a somewhat different historical and political approach to considering this issue. The purpose of the article is to analyze the ecological spirituality of the Sakha people in the context of an indigenous approach while considering a comparative analysis of new Russian and foreign exploratory works within the indigenous methodology. It should be noted that the methodology of indigenous research is still at the stage of research and development of its rationale and is not fully recognized by the academic community, although it has taken its place in the international scientific community. Is it possible to standardize the indigenous methodology as a single methodological basis so that both indigenous (as bearers of one or another studied culture) and nonindigenous researchers could understand each other? Are the analytical approaches and applied methods of both quantitative and qualitative research, which are now used in the global academic scientific practice, suitable for the interpretation of indigenous research studies? As Strauss and [5] write, indigenous studies are mostly of a qualitative research type. They identify the theoretical backgrounds and relationships between the subjects of research, since they do not involve statistical mathematical methods specific for quantitative research.

According to [2], phenomenology and narrative research usually correlate with the methodology of indigenous research, since the analysis of stories, tales, narratives of the culture-bearers is the basis for the search for truth and the thesis of the study. However, this methodology is still being questioned from the perspective of the official scientific paradigm.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW In the last century, the principle of ethnographic studies was foregrounded in a specific subject studied by a sideliner researcher; hence, the bearers of indigenous cultures became the subject of the study. As Kovach notes, American researchers used the term “exotic” to describe the culture-bearers, meaning researchers of the time considered their findings and observations from a Western European culture perspective. Thus, the conclusions of their studies matched their vision and understanding. In this regard, the research of Linda Tukhivay Smith, one of the first authors in the field of indigenous science, is of great importance. Linda Tukhivay Smith, a researcher and representative of Maori, the author of Decolonization of Scientific Methodologies [1], highlighted the relevance of developing new indigenous methodology. According to [1], to understand indigenous-related issues, political motives for the colonization of the indigenous people and their territories, and the growing need for decolonization processes, requires the development of a new, critically re-considered methodology and new ethno-cultural approaches revised from ethics perspectives. [1] Appealed to the indigenous researchers, saying these approaches can help identify specific, actual, relevant, and important issues

2

N.D.Neustroev, A.N.Neustroeva, A.A.Kozhurova, S.N.Shadrina, A.D.Nikolaeva, V.P.Marfusalova, A.P. Bugaeva, T.A.Shergina, A.G.Larionova, A.N.Chiryaev

for the indigenous people in terms of their self-conception and understanding of their place in the world. Such approaches can also help research move beyond the frameworks of epistemology that is widely accepted in the Western culture. In one way or another, this serves the interests of European scientific thinking and differs from the traditional indigenous paradigm and world perception. [6] , [7] , [8] , and [9] have similar opinions, who state that as a rule, the non-indigenous researchers, rather than subjects of their research, took advantages of bonuses and benefits obtained as the result of the researches. In this regard, it should be noted that the historical development of the Russian peoples and ethnic groups, and the process of their unification into a single federal state had a colonial period in the pre-revolutionary time. Therefore, for example, the conquest of the Siberian territories and the policy of subsequent colonization of the peoples of Siberia—specific to the pre-revolutionary period—also did not contribute to the development of the education system, science, and culture.

Scientific studies of that period were also conducted by non-indigenous scientists and political exiles from central Russia. At that, the evaluation of the phenomena of ethnic culture, language, and customs of the peoples living in the North and Siberia were described by researchers in different ways, according to their subjective perception, the nature of phenomena and facts, as well as culture-specific elements misstated in their studies. A parochial education has been widespread in the North-East of Siberia withn the aim of converting the indigenous population to Christianity during the pre-revolutionary period. Although the parochial schools had curricula for “aboriginals” and “indigenous” people and included such subjects such as reading and writing in a natural dialect, they had, in fact, not been studied. Thus, during this period, the educational policy was not implemented in the interests of the indigenous population. Evidently, the political situation that arose in Russia in the early 20th century contributed to the Social Democratic Party that came into power in 1917, and declared the possibility of national self-determination and self-consciousness, the development of national and ethnic science, culture, education, and production as its main principles. In the 1920s, the processes of “indigenousization”, based on the native language and culture, have been widely implemented in education of the indigenous population and training of indigenous personnel in all spheres. It was during this period when the first indigenous educated intelligentsia, from among the representatives of the peoples of the North, appeared. They proactively initiated the introduction of indigenous science and cultural movement in all spheres of the national economy. With regards to the importance of political and social reforms of the early twentieth century, as representatives of indigenous science, we can conclude that since then, the issues associated with studying indigenous language, culture, science, and public policy in the region have become the subject of studies conducted mainly by the representatives of the indigenous population. Undoubtedly, in the 1930s, the leaders of the national movement of the indigenous population in Yakutia suffered mass repression and persecution. During the twentieth century, there was a certain lull in persecution, and the policy of internationalism was propagated to enhance the role of the Russian language as the national language of interethnic communication. Thereafter, only in the 1990s, when the Russian Federation set up and the Republic achieved sovereignty, did the issues of reviving spiritual culture, language, literature, science, and art of the indigenous population become important again, and the study of indigenous culture was then recognized at the state and official level. It should be noted, that the international policy established in the Soviet state contributed to the development of the indigenous approach within the framework of the scientific and pedagogical direction, which has been widely *Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

3

recognized in the country as “Ethno-pedagogy” since the 1960s of the 20th century. The most famous founders of the scholarly traditions of ethno-pedagogy includes Volkov, who is an outstanding researcher, ethnographer, teacher, and methodologist, and his followers [10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18]. Nowadays, every nation or ethnic group in Russia has its own scientists who were students of Volkov, and who are the indigenous researchers engaged in the study and promotion of researches in the field of training and education of the younger generation to aid in preserving and developing their native culture and language. Therefore, it can be concluded that in the past century, only representatives of indigenous cultures and scientists from among the bearers of a specific culture were engaged in studying the indigenous-related issues in Russia. In this regard, indigenous people, as a subject of the research, have been studied from the perspective of classical academic science only in the pre-revolutionary period. This was because the national policy of the Soviet state contradicted the condescending attitude toward indigenous research, which allowed them to obtain a significant amount of qualitative results of ethno-pedagogical research. Representatives of indigenous science insist on the fact that there is a difference between Western and indigenous way of thinking, which provokes philosophical, ideological and methodological conflicts among the followers of different schools. Here we agree with M. Kovach, who writes that indigenous studies consist of two aspects that can cause difficulties in perception or understanding the research materials and their interpretation by non-indigenous researchers. First, it is the native language of an indigenous researcher which has mobility and flexibility in application, semantic connotation, intonations and subtleties associated with the indigenous person’s understanding of the world; and non-native speakers experience difficulties in grasping and understanding it. And second, it is the indigenous knowledge itself. Such knowledge is descriptive, nature-like, animistic and sometimes it acquires a metaphysical nature. In this respect, the unique aspects of our cultures are rooted in the fact that the mentality, lifestyle, thinking and worldview inherited by the generations are determined by the place of residence. For example, the population living in the northern circumpolar territories, regardless of the country or region, has similar philosophical basis of the worldview, mentality, beliefs and traditions. All these aspects directly underlie the identity and self-esteem. In our opinion, it is legitimate to say that remarkable theorists played an important role in the formation of space for the decolonization of thinking and knowledge of indigenous peoples in the Western academic community, and the contribution the theorists made should be rewarded. On the other hand, indigenous researchers do not argue that the Western theory is useless, that this knowledge belongs only to the representative of a different culture and that we should not use it. Indigenous researchers intend to use all the best theoretical and methodological tools and want to develop new approaches, when necessary.

3. THEORETICAL BASIS The scientific study describes the concepts of research categories in a structural order, ranging from the Ethno-pedagogy and to the ecological spirituality. Ethno-pedagogy is the science which considers the national education in a multinational country, the upbringing of a person of a nation and the formation of an ethno-cultural personality. Ethno-pedagogy excludes the education of people of unknown parentage. Ethno-pedagogy can function only under conditions of constructive interethnic dialogues, which also consider the peculiarities of interfaith and even inter professional dialogues,

4

N.D.Neustroev, A.N.Neustroeva, A.A.Kozhurova, S.N.Shadrina, A.D.Nikolaeva, V.P.Marfusalova, A.P. Bugaeva, T.A.Shergina, A.G.Larionova, A.N.Chiryaev

while excluding any kind of spiritual, moral, intellectual and other possible conflicts.

Ethno-pedagogy can only act as the pedagogy of freedom and love. The question is: what is upbringing? And Ethno-pedagogy responds: “Example and love”, where conscience, morality and spirituality rule [10, 11, 19, 20, 21]. The classic appreciation actualize the idea of national education put forth by K.D. Ushinsky: “Every nation has its own specific educational system” [22]. The social environment cultivates the “second nature” of a person - the ethnic culture, but the intellectualization of a culture can be described by a meaningful word “cultivization”. Cultivization is a philosophical category proposed in 1912 by A.E. Kulakovsky, the brilliant thinker and prophet of the Sakha (Letter to the Yakut Intelligentsia). Cultivization, as a national idea, played its historical role in the revival of the ethnic culture of the Sakha people; it also influenced the breakthrough in all areas of social and economic development of the Republic of Sakha (Yakutia). That was such a great progress that practice was ahead of theory. Understanding of the scientific meaning of the philosophy of the cultivization appeared later. Of course, the process of cultivization is still ongoing and is enriched by the experience of international cooperation [23, 24, 25, 26]. It refers to a wide range of social and historical changes and environmental transformations of the “Nature-Man-Society” connections system: the transition from an agricultural economy to industrial production, a breakthrough of industrial civilization towards the information technologies, and then the beginning of digital era (global digitization of life). However, the progress also has a backside - the so-called crisis of a technocratic civilization. Mankind enthusiastically accepts the positive aspects of scientific and technological progress, but we are not fully aware of the potential disadvantages of the digital era. In this regard, it is appropriate to quote the words of I.E. Maximov: “All the evils of a technocratic civilization - a consumer society, health problems and moral degradation of a person are in one or another way associated with the weakening, deformation and direct destruction of the primordial umbilical connection of Man and Mother Nature and the violation of natural chastity of brain sobriety” [27]. Escaping from this crisis, we see the potential for solving the problem in the age-old indigenous methodology of the Sakha people through the trinity of the ecology of the inner world, the spiritual and cosmic essence of its nature: the ecology of nature, man and soul. Proceeding from the above and following the hierarchical basis, we can put forth an idea of ecological spirituality.

Ecological spirituality is the preservation, restoration and strengthening of the primordial, umbilical and ethnic mental connection between Man and Nature and the upbringing of the younger generation on the ideal of the Supreme Intelligence - the Noosphere. The initial point of our theoretical study of ecological spirituality on the example of the people of Sakha is the Yakut heroic epos Olonkho. Due to UNESCO has proclaimed it as “a masterpiece of oral non-material heritage of humanity” [28, 29, 23, 27] this study has been initiated.

4. METHODOLOGY The method used in this research implies a comparative analysis of the current status of Russian and foreign studies within the problems of indigenous methodology. Indigenous researchers proceed from the idea that their research should be aimed at finding solutions to problems within the framework of tribal indigenous local interpretation (Betty Bastien). In particular, in this study, we stick to this position in order to analyse the ecological spirituality on the example of the indigenous *Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

5

approach of indigenous researchers and scientists from among the Sakha people. The data collection is based on the historically established cultural tradition of the native people, and we adapt it for the application of modern parameters in the study. In this regard, the research methodology is the interpretation of the variative understanding of the philosophy of the Sakha people and their worldview on the basis of an indigenous methodology from the perspective of the meaning of life and the paradigm of the ecological and centrist understanding of the world. In particular, life is a vector of human ascension from the past to the future, from the earthly corporeal-material being to the Universal Spirit: the laying of the natural ethnic mental potential for development; intellectual and professional ascent; social and patriotic activity.

5. RESULT Indigenous approach, in other words “the inside” approach, in the context of realization of ecological spirituality of the Sakha people is based on the original knowledge of indigenous researchers through the prism of the natural ethno-cultural identity of peoples. The indigenous researchers say that the indigenous approach in the research is characterized by the analysis of stories, tales, narrations of culture bearers, which serves as the basis of the search for truth. In this regard, the researchers of the Sakha people claim that the unique aspects of indigenous cultures are rooted in the fact that the mentality, way of life, thinking and attitude to the world inherited by generations is determined by the place of residence. For example, the population living in the northern circumpolar territories, regardless of the country or region, has similar philosophical basis of the worldview, mentality, beliefs and traditions. In particular, the indigenous people of Alaska, Canada, American Indians and others are united by the pagan basis of beliefs, idolization of the forces of Nature and heaven. It is time to re-orient the educational system towards the indigenous, nature-aligned and anthropological approach. Indigenous approach - is an appeal to the ethnocultural origins of the nation. In particular, ethnocultural education based on Olonkho pedagogy becomes consonant with the global idea, which is aimed not only at our own existence and development, but also extends the peaceful coexistence of the entire human race. From the perspective of upbringing the younger generation, the content and forms of the pedagogy system of Olonkho lies in the language, folklore, history of the Sakha people; the values of their life and work, the traditional original spiritual and material culture, national education, the Teachings of Aiyy, the philosophy of the Sakha people - all together they represent a full picture of the World and the essence of the ecological spirituality of the Sakha people [26, 29, 23, 28].

6. DISCUSSION Our analysis of the studies of indigenous peoples is based on the key provisions of the monographic study written [2]. She considers the results of studying the indigenous peoples of North America and pays special attention on concepts that accompany research solutions and knowledge collection methods, samplings and protocols that acquire a special feature within the framework of the indigenous methodology. In connection with the practical aspects of the study of historical events conducted by indigenous peoples, the discussion proceeds to the consideration of the challenges associated with the data analyses and understanding the truth within the tribal interpretations. Despite the fact that a number of qualities within the study of indigenous peoples is an integral part of

6

N.D.Neustroev, A.N.Neustroeva, A.A.Kozhurova, S.N.Shadrina, A.D.Nikolaeva, V.P.Marfusalova, A.P. Bugaeva, T.A.Shergina, A.G.Larionova, A.N.Chiryaev

knowledge production, its application could cause difficulties in the interpretation of research methods. For indigenous researchers, research methods are closely related to the traditions and life of indigenous peoples. In the past decade, research protocols for indigenous peoples have been developed to protect them from ethical violations. Partially this task is of educational nature, while indigenous peoples state why research activities could have ethical implications for tribal culture. The main function of the protocols is in decolonization of research methods, i.e. re-consideration of any disrespectful aspects of research associated with the history of indigenous peoples. Due to such cases, indigenous research protocols have been developed based on community dialogue and case studies in ethically responsible research. According to, the truth (reality) is connected to the integrity of a person sharing his knowledge. Stephenson makes the following proposal to indigenous historians: “The task of historians is to restore the past and present it to the public in a form acceptable for the people whose experience and life it represents”. Thus, given the misinterpretation of indigenous culture in the context of research, the solution of an ethical problem should be considered vital. Many criticisms are found during the analysis of the political nature of knowledge formation in marginalized communities. Thus, in terms of indigenous research, [1] applies a special analysis of decolonization, which shows the extent to which the indigenous knowledge has been marginalized in Western research processes [2]. In particular, this caused difficulties in the context of studying Canadian Aboriginal people, as most of non-indigenous people forgot the colonial history of this country. At the international level, this could be observed through the globalization and the spread of consumer culture which feed the economic system to the detriment of ecology, as aimed to support the human species. Manu Aluli Meyer, an indigenous researcher, describes his connection with epistemology as follows: "The deeper I immerse in tribal knowledge systems, the more I resist Western methods of knowledge, although I realize that this contradicts the established principles."

Further, according to Meyer, epistemological presence in life and research exists everywhere, because epistemology reflects the relations of the quality of indigenous knowledge systems. It is this foundation that distinguishes indigenous research from Western methodologies. Thus, indigenous studies drew attention to the existence of a certain prevalence of western views and principles in science, as a result of which alternative research methods became marginalized and the issue of indigenous peoples was excluded from the methodological options. According to, the Western universities have established standards for scientific knowledge. In order to establish a framework for studying the indigenous peoples, it is necessary to critically assess the established standards and consider methodologies from the perspective of the indigenous people. The point is that the decolonizing theory and methods working in cooperation with the epistemology of the tribes change traditional, social and research relationships. The function of the decolonial goal implicates the provision of indigenous researchers with a context-analytical tool for identifying the visible contradictions and developing indigenous approaches. However, the struggle to preserve the indigenous cultural epistemological position in such powerful institutions as universities can once be absorbed by the Western thought. At the same time, all indigenous scientists agree to log what they have heard in order to avoid distortion of information. But at the same time, Stevenson says that oral histories of indigenous peoples do not share generally accepted categorical boundaries: “the folklore material is holistic — it includes religious teachings, metaphysical connections, cultural insight, history, language structures, literary and aesthetic form, and the "truth" of indigenous peoples. Gerald *Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

7

Vizenor notes that holistic knowledge is lost when stories are not transmitted orally: “So much is lost in translation — the general context of performance, gestures, intonation — even the best translations are abbreviations of the original”. On the basis of a comparative analysis and as it is noted above, aspects of our cultures (indigenous peoples of foreign countries and the Sakha people) are rooted in the fact that the mentality inherited by generations, lifestyle, thinking, and attitude to the world are determined by their place of residence. For example, the indigenous people of Alaska, Canada, American Indians and the people of Sakha are united by the pagan basis of beliefs, idolization of the forces of Nature and heaven. In this regard, A.E. Kulakovsky wrote that in the past the Yakuts had “a religion of a prominent development, which was forgotten due to the lack of writing and the process of conversion to Christianity. The utilitarian and materialistic attitude were specific for the Yakut religion; the Yakut belief was far from idolatry and shamanism, as it had passed this stage in several steps [30, 29]. On this stage, we proceed from the fact that the mission of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University involves the preservation and development of the cultures of the peoples living in the North-East of Russia and the circumpolar regions of the Arctic, which is one of the most important and priority areas for the strategic development of our federal university. So, among the newly created structural divisions of the university, there is an institute that implements programs for further in-depth study of the heroic epic literature of the Sakha - Olonkho, the world-class masterpiece, the philosophy of life and traditional popular method of younger generation upbringing [28, 23, 16, 31].

7. CONCLUSION The presented analysis of foreign studies and research conducted by scientists from among the Sakha people shows that the problem of studying the own indigenous culture, language, science and art has been analyzed by many authors on different continents in the framework of different social and political systems and situations. But we share the opinion, that in the future a tendency of special demand for the development of a new indigenous methodology will be observed, since the academic science has not officially adopted the methodological approaches developed by the representatives of the indigenous science. It should be noted, that the indigenous approach to the analysis of events and phenomena is worlds apart from the well-established traditional scientific research methodology, including methods for preparing the study, collecting data, processing information, etc. As it has been previously defined, the indigenous knowledge itself is descriptive, nature-like, animistic and sometimes acquires a metaphysical character. We agree that the methodology of the indigenous research includes ethical goals that suggest that the methodology should be consistent with the indigenous values. Any research should provide benefits and positive results for the indigenous population, and the researchers should act as an ally and be guided by "do no harm" principle. J. Porsanger defines the indigenous research as ethically correct study that meets the worldview of indigenous peoples, and the indigenous method should make steps towards accepting and popularizing knowledge on the indigenous population. These principles of the developed methodology of indigenous research should also find their place in the scientific discussion among the Russian research community, and become the part of a common understanding of the strategy for the development of research on indigenous issues. Thus, we consider the concept of ecological spirituality as a new direction of reviving the national idea of indigenous people being in the existing

8

N.D.Neustroev, A.N.Neustroeva, A.A.Kozhurova, S.N.Shadrina, A.D.Nikolaeva, V.P.Marfusalova, A.P. Bugaeva, T.A.Shergina, A.G.Larionova, A.N.Chiryaev

living conditions, as well as spiritual and moral education of their younger generation, since it is the indigenous approach that reflects the closeness and original nature of certain universal human values, concepts and ideals adopted by the peoples and ethnic groups at the genetic level. That is why we consider this concept in the potential of the primordially indigenous methodology of the Sakha people through the trinity of the ecology of the inner world, the spiritual and cosmic essence of its nature: the ecology of nature, man, soul. Indigenous approach, in other words "the inside" approach, in the context of ecological spirituality of Sakha people is based on the original knowledge of indigenous researchers considered through the prism of the natural ethno-cultural identity of peoples in the process of active national and spiritual revival of the Sakha culture inspired by the ecological spirituality of Yakut heroic epos Olonkho and Teachings of Aiyy as a centuries-old indigenous methodological basis for the development of ethnic mentality, the originality of traditional life in the North, the development of ethnocultural education, the creation of a space for scientific interpretation and the demand for the origination of ecological spirituality in the modern technocratic world.

8. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The article has been prepared under the RFBR grant for project No. 19-013-00730 dated December 28, 2018.

9. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL No data is used or generated from this study.

10. REFERENCES [1] Tuhiwai Smith L. Decolonizing Methodologies – Research and Indigenous peoples. London: Zed, 1999.

[2] Kovach M. Indigenous Methodologies: characteristics, conversations and contexts/ Margaret Kovach. University of Toronto Press, 2009.

[3] Kanaqluk (George P. Charles) Yuuyaraq (The Way of the Human Being) as Interpreted by a Contemporary Yup’ik Family. – 161–198 in Pentikäinen, J., Saressalo, H., Taksami, Ch. (eds.).

Shamanhood: Symbolism and epic. (Bibliotheca shamanistica, 9). Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó, 2001.

[4] Kawagley, Oscar, A. A Yupiaq Worldview: A Pathway to Ecology and Spirit. Waveland Press.

1995, 168 p.

[5] Strauss, A., Corbin, J. Basics of Qualitative research: techniques and procedures for Developing Grounded theory. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 1998.

[6] Bishop, R. Maori people’s concerns about research into their lives. History of Education Review, 1997, 26(1): 25-41.

[7] Bishop, Russell & Glynn, Ted. Culture Counts: Changing Power Relations in Education.

Dunmore Press, 1999.

[8] Mihesuah, Devon A. Natives and Academics: Researching and Writing about American Indians.

Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, (ed. 1998).

[9] Harvey, G. Readings in indigenous religions. London: Continuum, (ed. 2002). *Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

9

[10] Afanasyev V.F. Ethno-pedagogy of non-Russian peoples of Siberia and the Far East. Yakutsk: Yakutsk book publishing house, 1979. 180 p.

[11] Volkov G.N. Ethno-pedagogy: Textbook for students of secondary and higher pedagogical educational establishments М.: Academia, 2000. 168 p.

[12] Danilov D.A. Folk pedagogy and modern national school. Ulan-Ude: Bemy, 1993. 175 p.

[13] Cumarin V.V. Pedagogy of natural conformity and school reform. M.: Public Education, 2004.

624 p.

[14] Kadykova S.A. Formation of positive ethnic identity - the task of the modern national school // Reality of the ethnic group: globalization and national traditions of education in the context of the Bologna process. SPb .: Asterion, 2005. 536 p.

[15] Nikandrov N.D. Russia: socialization and education at the turn of the Millennium. M.: Helios ARV, 2000. 229 p.

[16] Neustroev N.D. Ethno-pedagogy of the peoples of the North. Yakutsk, 1999. 40 p.

[17] Portnyagin I.S. Kut-sur ethno-pedagogy. Moscow: Academy, 1999. 235 p.

[18] Pankin A.B. Formation of ethno-cultural personality. M.: MPSI, Voronezh: MODEK NPO, 2006.

[19] Neustroev N.D. Rural ungraded school in Yakutia under conditions of innovative development. Yakutsk: NEFU Publishing House, 2013. 241 p.

[20] Nikolaev V.A. Theory and methods for the formation of ethno-pedagogical culture of a teacher / D.Sc. in Pedagogic Sciences thesis. Moscow: Moscow State Pedagogical University, 1998.

[21] Semenova A.D. Pedagogical heritage and professional competence of a modern teacher.

Yakutsk: YaGU Publishing House, 2004. 160 p.

[22] Ushinsky K.D. Pedagogical writings. V. 5 / Comp. Egorov S.F. Moscow: Pedagogy, 1990.

[23] Lobok A.M. Diamond land of Olonkho pedagogy: pedagogical epic experience. Yakutsk: Dani-AlmaS company, 2007. 176 p.

[24] Mikhailov V.D., Mordinov A.E. Federalism as a form of protection of ethnic interests // Philosophical problems of the ethno-national development of modern society. Yakutsk: Saydam, 2010. 248 p. / P. 146-148.

[25] Maximov G.N. Ethnic groups in the conditions of globalization and the education // Philosophical problems of the ethno-national development of modern society. Yakutsk: Saydam, 2010. 248 p. / P. 109-112.

[26] Novikov A.G. Sakha's mentality. Monograph. Yakutsk, 1996. 147 p.

[27] Maximov I.E. The stages of ecological and spiritual ascent of the personality to the ideal of the supreme intelligence - the Noosphere. Novosibirsk: Ofset-TM LLC, 2018. 240 p.

[28] Grigorieva A.A. Baisheva M.I. Ethno-pedagogical views of the Sakha people: based on the Olonkho material. Novosibirsk: Science RAS, 2008. 243 p.

[29] Kondakov V.A. Aar Aiyy (Aar Aiyy religion). Red. Yakovleva A.I., Timofeev T.T. Yakutsk, 2011. 532 p.

[30] Kulakovsky A.E. Materials on the study of the Yakut beliefs. Yakutsk: Book Publishing, 1923.

10

N.D.Neustroev, A.N.Neustroeva, A.A.Kozhurova, S.N.Shadrina, A.D.Nikolaeva, V.P.Marfusalova, A.P. Bugaeva, T.A.Shergina, A.G.Larionova, A.N.Chiryaev

[31] Neustroev N., Neustroeva А., Sakerdonova A., Sleptsov Y., Rufov B. Small school as a sociocultural center in rural settlements of the North-East of Russia: search for the ways to preserve and develop // Revista ESPACIOS. Vol. 39. No. 23. 2018.

Professor Dr. Nikolai Dmitrievich Neustroev is Professor at Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. He holds a D.Sc. degree in Pedagogic Sciences. He is a Honored Scientist of the Russian Federation and the Republic of Sakha (Yakutia), a full member of the Academy of Pedagogical and Social Sciences of the Russian Federation, Head of the Master's program "Pedagogical Support of Childhood in the North". His research interests are National-Regional Education System, Rural Ungraded School, Pedagogical Innovations.

Dr.Anna Nikolaevna Neustroeva is an Associate Professor and Head of the Primary Education Department, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She received her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences. Her research interests include Teacher's Professional Competence, Regional Pedagogical Education History.

Dr.Alina Alekseevna Kozhurova is an Associate Professor at the Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She defended her thesis on the topic "Formation of Value Relations Among Younger Students to Ethnic Traditions in a Multicultural Environment." She has her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences. Her research includes Ethnopedagogy and Polycultural Education.

Dr.Sofia Nikolaevna Shadrina is an Associate Professor at the Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She defended her thesis on the topic "Optimization of the Process of Mastering the Moral Traditions of the Sakha People by Younger Schoolchildren" under the guidance of Professor N.D. Neustroev. She has her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences.

Her scientific interests are connected with Pedagogy, Elementary School and Ethnopedagogy.

Professor Dr.Alla Dmitrievna Nikolaeva is Professor and Head of the Department of Pedagogy, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She has her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences. Her scientific interests related to Regional Problems of Education Development, Pedagogical Innovations, Expertise, National Education History.

Dr.Venera Petrovna Marfusalova is an Associate Professor at the Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She has her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences. She is a member of the Arctic Council of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She participates in the implementation of Projects of Nomadic Schools and Teachers' Training for the Arctic Regions. Her scientific interests are pedagogical problems of education of indigenous peoples of the North.

Dr.Aya Petrovna Bugaeva is an Associate Professor works at the Primary Education Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She had a PhD Sciences. Her research interests are in the fields of General Education Regionalization, Professional Development of Primary School Teachers, Spiritual and Moral Development and

Department, in Pedagogic Personal and Education.

Dr.Tuyaara Alekseevna Shergina is an Associate Professor at the Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She defended her thesis on the topic “Pedagogical Conditions for the Modernization of the Educational Process of a Rural Small-Class School on the Example of the Republic of Sakha (Yakutia)” She has her PhD in Pedagogic Sciences. Her research interests are Ethnopedagogy and Small Rural Schools.

Dr.Alexandra Germanovna Larionova is an Associate Professor at the Department of Primary Education, Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. She defended her thesis on the topic “Ethnopedagogical foundations of the formation of the younger schoolchild’s musical culture” under the guidance of Professor N.D. Neustroev. Her research interests include Musical Pedagogy and Psychology.

Anatoly Nikolayevich Chiryaev is a graduate student of the Pedagogical Institute of the Ammosov North-Eastern Federal University. He is a Deputy Director for educational work of the Yakutsk City National Gymnasium of Yakutsk. His research interests are related to Ethnopedagogization of the Educational Process.

*Corresponding author (Anna N. Neustroeva). E-mail: anneneustroeva@yandex.ru. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11D http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11D.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.139

11

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11E

FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC INDICATORS OF ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT: EVIDENCE FROM ASIAN COUNTRIES Naila Rehman

a, b

, Muhammad Kashif Khurshid

a, c*

, Aamer Saleem

d

a

National University of Modern Languages, Islamabad, Pakistan. PAKISTAN Punjab College Samundari Faisalabad, PAKISTAN c GC University Faisalabad PAKISTAN d Riphah International University Islamabad, PAKISTAN b

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 29 April 2019 Received in revised form 08 July 2019 Accepted 26 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

This research examines the role of economic and financial indicators in boosting the economic advancement of Asian countries including; Bangladesh, Bhutan, China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, Sri Lanka, and Pakistan. Economic advancement indicates economic growth and economic development of any country. Economic advancement is measured through GDP growth. To predict the economic advancement three financial indicators i.e. interest spread rate (ISR), Quasi money (QM) and foreign direct investment (FDI) and three economic indicators i.e. inflation (CPI), population growth (POP) and industry value added (INDV) were used. Secondary data were obtained from the websites of State Bank of Pakistan (SBP), World Bank, WDI and International financial statistics (IFS). Data of eight countries for a time span of 31 years from 1985 to 2015 formed it as a panel combination with 248 observations. Various tests and analysis techniques were applied to get results such as descriptive statistics, correlation analysis, and panel regression analysis. For panel regression; panel unit roots test, redundant fixed effects test & Hausman test were used and finally, fixed effects model is applied to test the hypotheses. Panel regression results showed that there is a negative and significant impact of inflation (CPI) on the economic advancement of Asian countries. While foreign direct investments (FDI) showed a positive and significant role in enhancing the economic advancement of selected Asian countries. The results also revealed that industry value added (INDV) and quasi money (QM) have negative but insignificant impact on economic advancement while population growth (POP) and interest spread rate (ISR) have positive but insignificant impact on the economic advancement of Asian countries.

As a whole, both financial and economic sector indicators can be used to predict economic advancement of Asian countries. This study provides assistance to policymakers and investors for their decision making.

Keywords: Foreign Direct Investment; Inflation; Population Growth; Interest Spread Rate; Industry Value-Added; Quasi Money; Economic Advancement.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH. *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

1

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT Economic advancement or growth has been focused in all countries. All governments, as well as the general public, have interests in economic advancement (Tan, 2012). Economic development refers to a state in which the GDP per capita increases persistently and there should be an increase in the structure of the economy. Economic advancement reflects economic growth and economic development. Ohno (2005) asserted that internal and external factors influence the process of economic development. Today to achieve the motive of development it is necessary to coordinate and participate with the global system. Modernization of a country in term of industrial development, trade and investment are stairs for economic development.

Economic growth and development is a quantitative measure referred toward the number of goods and services produced in an economy. Economic growth is a two-way directional concept.

Directions are either negative or positive. The negative impact such as recession and depression phase causes a shrinking of the economy. The short-run stability in business phase and long run in the economy is the indication of positive effect means the development of the economy.

Cultural, economic, political, social and financial dynamics are the foundation of development and growth of any economy whether developed or developing. Even on the ground of these bases, an economy may lead to progress or collapses. Statistical data of many indicators are used as a base or measure or to rank the different economies of the world. And sometimes to indicate the condition of overall world’s economy the following some indicators are used: GDP: Real growth rate, GDP: per capita income, Inflation rate: CPI (consumer price index), Employment: Unemployment rate, Industrial production growth rate, Yearly import and export rate, Debt rate: external debt rate, Yearly economic Aid recipient (ODA), Airports, Railway, Roadways for transportation, Communication facilities: Telephone, internet services, World military expenditure etc.

Financial indicators include all variables that have a direct influence on banking sector ingredients. Financial sector’s strength is the foundation for economic growth. There is a close relationship between financial strength and the real economy. The development of financial sections should lead in the direction of economic growth. Typically, financial services did efficient resource deployment and credit enlargement to elevate the level of investment as well as well-organized capital growth. In developed countries, the possible positive relationship between credit market and economic growth exist. Therefore, the policies for the development of the financial sector also needed and it is also expected that it would improve the economic growth of a country. Definitely, bank credit shows a considerable part in the economic development of an economy (Khan & Senhadji, 2002). Yakubu and Affoi (2014) used bank credit to the private sector as financial sector indicators. Al-Malkawi, Marashdeh, and Abdullah (2012) for financial intermediation ratio used credit by a bank to the private sector. For deep understanding first of all private sector means an area of ownership in an economy by individual and corporates or organizations that are not in hands of the government. Government of an economy has no involvement in the ownership of such activity. Most of the times, the one and most important reason to construct the private ownership of the business to earn the profit and strengthen the economy.

2

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

Economies achieve many advantages by international trade. Countries can enjoy the benefits of available resources, comparative cost benefits, scarcity of food, end of monopoly, optimum use of resources, stability in the supply of goods, demand fulfillment, foreign reserve, goodwill of the country, good relations with a trading country, facilities of modern technology and innovation.

International trade is one of the strongest factors as the main source for the economic growth of an economy. International trade is a contributing factor to economic development. The international trade has also referred to as trade openness due to the manner in which an economy exposes its trade at international level (Tan, 2012).

The literature on financial economics delivers support for the dispute that countries with well-organized credit systems grow quicker whereas unproductive credit systems endure the risk of bank mischance (Kasekende, 2008). Moreover, in an economy, the credit institutions are like bridges between the excess profit and discrepancy in any sector of the economy. Hence, a better operational credit system lessens the external financing restraints that block credit expansion, and indirectly the firms and industries are also blocked to expand (Mishkin, 2007).

Museru, Toerien, and Gossel (2014) shed light on the question of whether the volatility of aid inflow and volatility of public investment contributes to the growth of the economy. They used an empirical model by alienating sample into four-five years. The model assessed that the volatility of both factors had a positive relation with economic growth.

Some economic and financial indicators are under consideration for measuring their impact on eight Asian economies named as Bhutan, China, Indonesia, Japan, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Bangladesh, and Singapore. Selected economic indicators are economic growth (GDP), foreign direct investment (FDI), inflation (CPI), population growth (POP), interest spread rate (ISR), Quasi money (QM) and industry value added (INDV).

1.2 A GLIMPSE OF ASIAN COUNTRIES ECONOMY In this study, the observed countries are part of Asian countries. According to the gross domestic product at PPP in CIA factbook and world map these countries are categorized as follows: China and Japan both are positioned at the northeast Asia portion. These are ranked according to GDP in Asia and in the world as China in Asia at no. 1st and in the world at 2nd rank and Japan at 3rd rank in Asia, at 4th rank in the world. Indonesia and Malaysia are the part of Southeast Asia with rank 5th, 12th in Asian countries respectively and rank 15th, 29th in the world respectively on the basis of GDP. South Asian countries include Pakistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, and Sri Lanka. In Asia ranking, Pakistan is at 10th, Bangladesh at 14th, Bhutan at 41st and Sri Lanka at 24th by GDP (PPP). In the world ranking, these are at 26th, 33rd, 158th, and 61th respectively on bases of GDP (PPP).

1.3 RESEARCH OBJECTIVE 

To examine the economic advancement change due to financial and economic indicators together.

1.4 RESEARCH QUESTIONS 

What is the influence and direction of the relationships among economic advancement and both

*Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

3

economic indicators and financial indicators collectively? 

What is the impact of inflation on economic advancement?



What is the impact of population growth on economic advancement?



What is the impact of industrial performance on economic advancement?



What is the impact of interest spread rate on economic advancement?



What is the impact of foreign direct investment on economic advancement?



What is the impact of quasi money on economic advancement?

1.5 RESEARCH PROBLEM Fluctuations in an economy is a result of the influence of many sectors indicators like service, manufacturing, economic and financial indicators. But economic sector indicators and financial sector indicators are the major sources of economic development and advancement. Even opposite to it these sectors are also the reason for economic instability and decrement. Economic and financial sectors are the cause of instability in many economies. Financial and economic indicators are the foundations of economic advancement respectively shown by literature in economies of different countries. Economic advancement of China, Japan, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Indonesia, and Bhutan has been measured by both economic and financial indicators.

1.6 RESEARCH CONTRIBUTION Current research effort used both financial sector indicators and economic sector indicators to demonstrate their influence on the economic advancement of eight Asian countries.

1.7 RESEARCH SIGNIFICANCE The study is significant for both economic as well as for the financial sector. Investors can come to know about the development and growth rate of different Asian countries in different aspects. This knowledge can help them to make a decision about their investment. This research has demonstrated the effect of considered variables which are important to keep in mind during policymaking. This research is also beneficial for the banking and financial sectors for the managerial view.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW 2.1 FINANCIAL SECTOR INDICATORS Meyer and Shera (2017) collected the data from 1999 to 2013 of six high remittance-receiving countries. The multiple regression model scanned that worker remittances have a significant and positive relationship with all these selected countries. Bashir, Mansha, Zulfiqar and Riaz, (2014) applied OLS and Granger Causality analytical tools concluded the negative impact of FDI on Pakistan, India, and Bangladesh while Sri Lanka has a positive impact. Saleem, Zahid, Shoaib, Mohamood, and Nayab (2013) explored the association of inflation and economic growth with FDI. From 1990 to 2011, they assessed FDI had a direct relation with INF and GDP. Every increase in the rate of GDP and INF created an increase in FDI. GuechHeang and Moolio (2013) investigated the association between FDI and growth using both direct and indirect methods for the estimation of

4

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

results. Results showed FDI growth rate had a long-run positive association with GDP growth.

Cecchetti and Kharroubi (2015) examined the financial sector growth and economic growth of 20 countries by using 30 year’s penal data. The results showed a negative relationship between growth factors. They concluded that if economic growth reduces it means financial growth fasters.

Kiptui (2014) provided empirical evidence for factors influencing the ISR in the banking sector of Kenya’s economy. This effort used 39 customer banks and concluded that macroeconomic, as well as industrial indicators, had a significant role in ISR. Ogunmuyiwa and Ekone (2010) investigated the economic growth behavior due to the money supply in Nigeria. For this purpose, descriptive statistics and inferential statistical tools of ordinary least square were utilized. They also used the VAR (Vector Auto Regression) technique and the Granger Causality test to judge the direction, employing data from 1982 to 2006. The test concluded that there was no significant impact of money supply on real GDP even GDP has a positive association with the money supply. The results of the study were contradicting with the results of Ikechukwu (2012) study.

The Nigerian economy was observed by Yakubu and Affoi (2014) with respect to commercial banks credit to the private sector for a time span of 1992-2012. They employed the econometric technique named a simple regression and assessed that the relationship was significant. The financial sector had a negative impact on economic growth evident by the Nigerian economy. The research was conducted by Olusegun, Ganiyu, and Oluseyi (2013) by using the OLS method of regression analysis.

Financial indicators like liquid liability ratio to GDP, real interest rate and private credit ratio to GDP from 1992-2008 were used.

2.2 ECONOMIC SECTOR INDICATORS Parvathamma (2014) anatomized the Indian economy from 1958-2014, using GDPD as a proxy to measure inflation and revealed that the common man suffered greatly by increasing inflation. Barro (2013) utilized the data from 100 countries for the period of 1960 to 1990 and the results of regression have shown that the increase in inflation rate put an impact on per capita GDP and investment.

Chughtai, Malik and Aftab (2015) examined the relation of inflation, interest rate, exchange rate and GDP from 1981 to 2013. By applying multiple linear regression model it was summed up that negative relation exists among inflation, interest rate. However, the exchange rate has a positive impact on GDP. Furuoka (2014) narrated the casual relationship for Malaysian Sarawak between population and real per capita income during 1980-2005. By utilizing econometric techniques, it was summed up that economic growth could not increase by population but population could be increased by economic growth. Darrat and Al-Yousif (1999) investigated the link between economic growth and population growth, showing the impact on both long-run and short-run effect. Twenty developing countries’ economies were considered as sample covered 1950-1996. They used error-correction, co-integration techniques for investigation. They revealed that there was a long run presence of a link between population and economic growth. While in short-run there was slight relation among variables. In the long run, the population affected the economy badly.

Sultan (2008) considered industry value-added as a major determinant of economic growth and *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

5

also to import and exports. The key effort was to sort out the query whether industry value-added, imports and exports generate GDP growth or not. The study utilized the annual time series data covering the time period of 1965 to 2004. Annual time series data was in the form of Bangladesh local currency and collected from different authentic sources. The results of the correlation matrix indicated a positive relation of all independent indicators with GDP growth ratio. The regression test also specified that only the contributions of exports growth rate and imports growth rate were not adequate for an impressive economic growth rate. Ellahi, Mehmood, Ahmad and Khattak (2011) explored the empirical association between trade openness, industry value-added and economic growth of Pakistan. Growth of developing nations is no doubt greatly influenced by indicators under observation. They followed the method employed by Sultan (2008). The study showed results that there was no strong and positive link between exports and growth of Pakistan. At the same time, it was also concluded that imports of capital goods boost up the industry value added which boosts the GDP growth.

Nasir and Saima (2010) found a significant negative relation of inflation and the significant positive impact of investment on GDP by using a linear model. Moreover, population growth also had a significant positive relation with GDP. They used an equation for estimation of relation and applied two threshold levels and found nonlinear relation.

2.3 RESEARCH HYPOTHESES Based on the literature discussed above the following hypotheses were developed and tested in this study.

H1: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and economic sector and financial sector indicators collectively.

H2: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and inflation (CPI).

H3: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and population growth (POP).

H4: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and industrial performance (INDV).

H5: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and interest spread rate (ISR).

H6: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and foreign direct investment (FDI).

H7: There is a significant relationship between economic advancement and quasi money (QM).

3. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY For the purpose to ascertain the financial and economic sector indicators for economic advancement in Asian countries available data and information are assembled. The nature of data and information is completely based on annual values. The data was in the form of an annual data series.

The data for the current study is considered on the time span of 31 years from 1985 to 2015. The sample size for the current study is comprised of eight Asian countries. These countries are selected on the bases of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG). IUGG during its 26th general assembly 2015 declared these countries as developing countries. The names of these eight Asian countries are; Bhutan, China, Indonesia, Japan, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Bangladesh, and

6

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

Pakistan. For the current study, the under observation factors are divided into two categories 1st is economic sector factors and 2nd is financial sector factors. The economic sector factors that are under observation named as Inflation (CPI), population growth rate (POP) and industry valve added (INDV). The financial sector indicators that are under observation named as interest spread rate (ISR), Quasi money (QM) and foreign direct investment (FDI). Secondary data is gathered for this purpose from the website of index Mundi, State Bank of Pakistan (SBP), World Bank, WDI and International financial statistics (IFS).

3.1 DEPENDENT VARIABLE 3.1.1 ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT Dependent indicator of the current study is economic advancement. Economic advancement means economic growth and economic development. Economic advancement of an economy comes when the individuals of an economy get strong income capacity. In many economies for the measurement of living standard of people in a country an adjusted GDP per capita has been used as a proxy. In a given time period GDP per capita calculate the income of a common person. So, the real GDP per capita may be a more appropriate measure for valuation of growth (Tan, 2012). This study used Gross Domestic Production as a proxy for the measurement of economic advancement.

3.2 INDEPENDENT VARIABLES 3.2.1 MONEY SUPPLY (QUASI MONEY M2) Money supply has various measures for it. The measures depend upon every country that how they use it and how they classify it. The money supply is abbreviated as M’s. There are many M’s like M0, M1, M2, M3, and M4. Every M has its own definition. Basically, it is the aggregated quantity of monetary resources available in an economy at some specified time period. Money supply not only considers currency or coins it also considers bank time and demand deposits as well as deposits in the post office and other instruments available that relate to its nature. Moreover, quantity theory also supports the relationship between money supply and inflation (pricing). According to its long term inflation is also caused by the fluctuation in the money supply.

3.2.2 INTEREST SPREAD RATE (ISR) Basically, interest spread rate is used by the financial and banking sectors. The bank calculates the ISR by the difference between interest earned by the bank on loans and interest paid by the bank on deposits, i.e., ISR = bank lending rate – bank deposit rate.

3.2.3 FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT (FDI) FDI indicates the investment made in the host country by foreigners directly in the organization, equipment, all assets for income generation. FDI includes three types of inward FDI, outward FDI and net FDI. Inward FDI means all inflow from the foreign inside the host country. Outward FDI means outflow towards foreign countries. Net FDI means the difference between inward and outward FDI flows. GuechHeang and Moolio (2013) used inflows for measuring foreign direct investment.

This study also used the inflows of foreign direct investment for the collection of data. *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

7

3.2.4 INFLATION Inflation is an upsurge of a price for commodities and facilities, i.e., a decrease in purchasing power of buyer or reduction in purchasing power of the money. The increasing rate of inflation price is called a rate of inflation. Nasir and Saima (2010) used the consumer price index as a proxy of inflation in 2010. Ayyoub, Chaudhry, and Farooq (2011) and Younus (2013) also used CPI to measurer inflation.

3.2.5 POPULATION GROWTH RATE Sociologically a collection of human beings is regarded as population. At a certain time, a total of people of living there are called the population of that area. For the population growth measurement, it is used in the form of an annual percentage.

3.2.6 INDUSTRIAL PERFORMANCE (INDUSTRY VALUE ADDED) Nowadays in modern times the development and advancement of an economy are possible through industrial performance. Industrial performance helps a country to make exports and make useful imports also. In the time of industrial growth, the imports of capital good increased. This import further results in the enhancement of production capacity which leads toward exports. The proxy of industrial performance is industry value added in this study. It is operationalized in the form of a percentage of GDP. Sultan (2008) also used industry value added as a proxy to industrial performance. The industrial growth was necessary because industrial goods have the capability to improve the growth as it increases the rate of production as production improved it affect the rate of exports and imports. So, ultimately it enhances the industrial growth rate. For Bangladesh, the factor imports and exports were of comparative benefit which accelerated the industrialization and GDP growth rate. At whole, the growth of an economy was not possible with only imports and exports unless or until economic growth rate was caused due to industry value-added.

3.3 CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK The conceptual framework for this study is given in Figure 1.

Economic Advancement

Gross Domestic Production (GDP)

Financial and Economic Indicators Interest Spread Rate (ISR) Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) Quasi Money (QM) Inflation (CPI) Population Growth (POP) Industrial Performance (INDV)

Figure 1: Conceptual Framework

8

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

3.4 ECONOMETRIC MODELS The following econometric models developed to ascertain the research objectives and analysis, GDPit = βO + β1 (ISR it ) + β2 (FDIit ) + β3 (QMit ) + 𝑒it

(1),

GDPit = βO + β1 (CPIit ) + β2 (POPit ) + β3 (INDVit ) + 𝑒it

(2),

GDPit = 𝛽0 + β1 (CPIit ) + β2 (POPit ) + β3 (INDVit ) + β4 (ISR it ) +β5 (QM it ) + β6 (FDIit ) + 𝑒it

(3),

Where; Constant βo = The intercept of the linear equation, Coefficients In the model for financial indicators β1 = The co-efficient for (consumer price index), β2 = The co-efficient for population growth rate, β3 = The co-efficient industry value-added, β4 = The co-efficient for interest spread rate, β5 = The co-efficient for Quasi money, β6 = The co-efficient for foreign direct investment, Dependent Variable GDP = ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT, Independent Variables ISR = Interest spread rate, QM = Quasi money M2, FDI = foreign direct investment, CPI = inflation, POP = population growth, INDV = industry value-added, and Error Term (ε) corresponds to the error term.

4. DATA ANALYSIS AND RESULTS DISCUSSION Descriptive analysis, correlation matrix and other techniques for penal data are used. Descriptive analysis, correlation matrix, redundant fixed effects test, Hausman test, fixed effects model and random effects model are used in current research. For the purpose to handle the panel data; STATA and Eviews are used.

4.1 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS Table 1 shows the results of descriptive statistics of the financial and economic indicator along with the economic advancement of selected eight Asian countries. There were 248 observations of seven variables. The mean values of all financial indicators i.e. interest spread rate (ISR), foreign *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

9

direct investment (FDI), and quasi money M2 (QM) are 5.2681, 1.2367 and 25.0861 respectively.

The mean values of all economic indicators i.e. inflation (CPI), population growth (POP) and industry added value (INDV) are 6.4226, 1.55122 and 31.8415 respectively. While the mean value of GDP is 5.5786 having minimum (-13.10), maximum (28.70), range (41.80) and standard deviation of 3.7808.

Table 1: Descriptive analysis Variables N Mean Minimum Maximum Range SD GDP 248 5.5786 -13.1000 28.7000 41.8000 3.7808 CPI 248 6.4226 -18.1000 58.4000 76.5000 6.0268 INDV 248 31.8415 0.0000 48.5000 48.5000 8.8528 POP 248 1.5512 -1.8000 3.4000 5.2000 1.0244 ISR 248 5.2681 -6.9000 11.8000 18.7000 3.2046 QM 248 25.0861 -43.7000 72.8000 116.5000 20.0891 FDI 248 1.2367 -2.8000 12.0000 14.8000 1.7399 Note: the GDP denominated the value of dependent variable gross domestic production, CPI is representing the value consumer price index, FDI denominated the value of foreign direct investment, INDV indicate the value of industry value-added, ISR denominated the value of interest spread rate, QM indicates the value of quasi money M2, POP denominated population growth.

Table 1 also shows SD indicating dispersion from its average mean value. The quasi money with SD 20.0891 shows that its data has highly deviated and the SD value 1.24 of population growth rate is an indication of less deviation of data from their mean values.

4.2 CORRELATION ANALYSIS A statistical tool or technique that is used to find out the relation or association among the study variables is named as correlation test. It is not only used to find the relation but it is also used to know the direction of relationship i.e. positive, negative or even no correlation among the study variables.

Table 2: Correlation Matrix GDP CPI INDV POP ISR QM FDI GDP 1 CPI -0.0885 1 INDV 0.1724 -0.0156 1 POP 0.2447 -0.0500 0.0239 1 ISR 0.4305 -0.0349 0.1265 0.2057 1 QM 0.3700 0.0908 0.1722 0.1919 0.5034 1 FDI 0.2738 -0.0503 0.2792 0.2282 -0.0735 0.0964 1 Note: the GDP denominated the value of dependent variable gross domestic production, CPI is representing the value consumer price index, FDI denominated the value of foreign direct investment, INDV indicate the value of industry value-added, ISR denominated the value of interest spread rate, QM indicates the value of quasi money M2, POP denominated population growth.

Table 2 has shown the results of correlation analysis. This test tells the relationship of study variables i.e. gross domestic production inflation, foreign direct investment, industry value-added, interest spread rate, quasi money M2 and population growth rate. The positive values indicate a positive relationship while the negative values indicate a negative relationship. The variables that are positively correlated shows the direction of relations as direct. If one variable tends to increase, then other variables also tend to increase or if one variable tends to decrease then other also tends to decrease. The variables that are negatively correlated shows the direction of relations as inverse or indirect. If one variable tends to increase, then other variables tend to decrease or if one variable tends to decrease then others tend to increase. Considering the values of correlation with GDP and other variables the values are respectively like this, the foreign direct investment is +0.273, inflation is -0.0885, the industry added value is +0.174, interest spread rate +0.4305, quasi money M2 is

10

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

+0.3700, population growth +0.2447. POP, INDV, QM, ISR, and FDI are positively associated.

However, CPI is negatively associated with the economic advancement (gross domestic production) of Asian economies named as Bangladesh, Bhutan, China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, Sri Lanka, and Pakistan.

4.3 PANEL DATA ANALYSIS 4.3.1 PANEL UNIT ROOT TEST For data examination, the stationary of data is an important factor. Panel unit root test is applied to the stationarity of the data. When data is stationary the results are reliable. Or contrary to this if the unit root test shows nonstationary data then results are also spurious.

Table 3: Panel Unit Root Test (Levin, Lin & Chu test) Variable GDP CPI INDV POP ISR QM FDI

Statistics Values -3.85108 -1.55474 -5.58388 -4.92299 -4.14925 -3.65449 -3.65449

Sig. 0.0001 0.0002 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.0001

Conclusion 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level 1(0) Stationary at level

The null hypothesis regarding the unit root test is that the data has unit root (at level) and the alternative hypothesis is data has no unit root at the level. H0 is showing the no stationary and H1 is showing the stationary of data. Table 3 shows the output of the test is showing that the data of all the study variables are stationary at level. So, the alternative hypothesis (H1) is accepted.

4.3.2 REDUNDANT FIXED EFFECTS TEST As there are three regression models for panel data. One is the common effects model (OLS), second is the random effects model and third is the fixed-effects model. Only one of these models can be used instead of all. Which one is an appropriate model to use is an important question to decide. So for such purpose redundant fixed effects test is used to decide between the common effects and fixed effects model.

Table 4: Redundant Fixed Effects Tests Effects Test Cross-section F Cross-section Chi-square

Statistic 7.740412 51.651994

d.f.

(7,234) 7

Prob. <0.001 <0.001

Results of Table 4 shows the redundant fixed effect test for the econometric model i.e. the role of financial and economic indicators on economic advancement. In Table 4 probability value (<0.001) indicates at 1% level of significance. The significant result accepts the alternative hypothesis that is a fixed effect model is appropriate. So it is concluded that the common effect model is not favorable and the fixed effect model is appropriate and can be applied.

4.3.3 HAUSMAN TEST Gujrati and Porter (2009) demonstrated that the use of the Hausman test, as a distinction among fixed effects and random effects. In fixed the assumption of own fixed intercept value for each cross-section exists. However, the assumption for ECM is to have same (common) intercept *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

11

representing the mean value for all cross-sections (N) and in this model to represent the individual intercept deviation from mean value error component is used. This error component is also known as unobservable.

Table 5: Hausman Test Test Summary Chi-Sq. Statistic Chi-Sq. d.f. Prob.

Cross-section random 37.414961 6 <0.001 Note: the GDP denominated the value of dependent variable gross domestic production, CPI is representing the value consumer price index, FDI denominated the value of foreign direct investment, INDV indicate the value of industry value-added, ISR denominated the value of interest spread rate, QM indicate the value of quasi money M2 and POP denominated population growth,

Table 5 demonstrates the result of the Hausman test for the role of economic and financial indicators in economic advancement. This is applied for the selection of the appropriate model between random-effects model and fixed-effects model. The null hypothesis for the Hausman test is that the random effect model is appropriate and the alternative hypothesis is that the random effect model is not appropriate. The p-value is almost zero (<0.05) indicating the alternative hypothesis is accepted and fixed-effects model is best fitted.

Table 6: Fixed Effect Model Variable Coefficient Std. Error t-Statistic Prob.

C 5.139 1.144 4.491 <0.0001 CPI -0.136 0.038 -3.532 0.0005 INDV -0.009 0.031 -0.298 0.7663 POP 0.236 0.246 0.957 0.3395 ISR 0.131 0.094 1.385 0.1673 QM -0.013 0.014 -0.899 0.3692 FDI 0.706 0.142 4.962 <0.0001 R2 0.438 F-statistic 14.05103 Adjusted R2 0.407 Prob(F-statistic) <0.00001 Note: GDP denominated the value of dependent variable gross domestic production, CPI is representing the value consumer price index, FDI denominated the value of foreign direct investment, INDV indicate the value of industry value-added, ISR denominated the value of interest spread rate, QM indicates the value of quasi money M2, POP denominated population growth.

The fixed-effect model in Table 6 illustrates the effect of economic indicators and financial indicators on the economic advancement of eight Asian countries. The significant influence of independent variables on the dependent variable is shown with probability values in their respective rows. The outcome shows that according to the p-values of the independent variables such as CPI and FDI having a significant effect with the p-values of +0.0005 and +0.0000 respectively on the economic advancement of all eight Asian economies at 1% level of significance. CPI has a negative and significant impact on economic advancement while the FDI has a positive and significant impact on economic advancement. GuechHeang and Moolio (2013) also found a positive and significant impact of FDI. Babatunde and Shuaibu (2011); Elias and Noone (2011); Mallik and Chowdhury (2001) also found a positive and significant impact of CPI on economic growth. The variable INDV, POP, ISR, and QM shows an insignificant role in the detection of economic advancement in Asian countries. Dao (2012) found a negative impact of POP in developing countries; Lozeau (2007) also supported these results. Results also show an insignificant impact of ISR on GDP which is supported

by Olusegun et al. (2013). The coefficient values of the independent variables are to indicate the direction and extent of the impact of indicator on economic advancement. The coefficient values of three independent variables population growth rate, interest spread rate and foreign direct investment are showing a positive role in enhancing the economic advancement in eight Asian economies. But

12

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

the coefficient values of three independent variables i.e. CPI, INDV, and QM are indicating the negative impact on the economic advancement of eight Asian countries. The value of R-squared defines the total impact in percentage caused by all the independent indicators used in the study on the economic advancement of the Asian countries. The value of R-squared is 43.9 % that means 43.9 % change in economic advancement of eight Asian economies is caused by the concerned factors.

F-statistics value describes the model overall i.e. well fitted or not. The value of F-statistic is 0.00001 (<0.00000) indicates that the model is best fitted.

5. CONCLUSION The study was conducted in the intension to find the role of financial and economic indicator on the economic advancement of Asian countries i.e. China, Japan, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Indonesia, and Bhutan. Three economic indicators i.e. Inflation (CPI), population growth rate (POP) and industry valve added (INDV) and three financial indicators i.e. interest spread rate (ISR), Quasi money (QM) and foreign direct investment (FDI) were used to predict their role in boosting the economic advancement of Asian countries. For the purpose of analysis secondary data was obtained from the websites of State Bank of Pakistan (SBP), World Bank, WDI and International financial statistics (IFS). Data of eight countries for a time span of 31 years from 1985 to 2015 formed it a panel combination. Data were analyzed by applying the fixed-effects model. The results showed that CPI has a negative and significant impact on the economic advancement of Asian countries which supports and accepts the 2nd hypothesis (H2) of the study. The results also proved that FDI has a positive and significant impact on the economic advancement of Asian countries which supports and accepts the 6th hypothesis (H6) of the study. While other four independent variables such as industry value added (INDV), interest spread rate (ISR), quasi money (QM) and population growth (POP) showed no significant impact on economic advancement. So, H3, H4, H5, and H7 were rejected based on insignificant results. Moreover, the results indicate that all independent variables chase up to 43 % change in the economic advancement of selected Asian countries i.e. Bangladesh, Bhutan, China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, Sri Lanka, and Pakistan.

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data used or generated from this study is available upon request to the corresponding author.

7. REFERENCES Al-Malkawi, H.-A. N., Marashdeh, H. A., & Abdullah, N. (2012). Financial development and economic growth in the UAE: Empirical assessment using ARDL approach to co-integration. International Journal of Economics and Finance, 4(5), 105–115.

Ayyoub, M., Chaudhry, I. S., & Farooq, F. (2011). Does Inflation Affect Economic Growth? The case of Pakistan. Pakistan Journal of Social Sciences (PJSS), 31(1).

Babatunde, M. A., & Shuaibu, M. I. (2011). Money supply, inflation and economic growth in Nigeria.

Asian-African Journal of Economics and Econometrics, 11(1), 147–163.

Barro, R. J. (2013). Inflation and economic growth. Annals of Economics & Finance, 14(1).

Bashir, T., Mansha, A., Zulfiqar, R., & Riaz, R. (2014). Impact of FDI on economic growth: a comparison of South Asian States & China. EU Scientific Journal, ESJ, 10(1). *Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

13

Cecchetti, S. G., & Kharroubi, E. (2015). Why does financial sector growth crowd out real economic growth?

Chughtai, M. W., Malik, M. W., & Aftab, R. (2015). Impact of Major Economic Variables on Economic Growth of Pakistan. Acta Universitatis Danubius: Oeconomica, 11(2).

Dao, M. Q. (2012). Population and economic growth in developing countries. International Journal of Academic Research in Business and Social Sciences, 2(1), 6.

Darrat, A. F., & Al-Yousif, Y. K. (1999). On the long-run relationship between population and economic growth: Some time series evidence for developing countries. Eastern Economic Journal, 25(3), 301–313.

Elias, S., & Noone, C. (2011). The growth and development of the Indonesian economy. RBA Bulletin, 33–43.

Ellahi, N., Mehmood, H. Z., Ahmad, M., & Khattak, N. A. (2011). Analyzing empirical relationship between trade openness, industrial value added and economic growth: A case study of Pakistan.

Journal of Contemporary Research in Business, 3(1), 754–763.

Furuoka, F. (2014). Population and economic development in Sarawak, Malaysia.

GuechHeang, L., & Moolio, P. (2013). The relationship between gross domestic product and foreign direct investment: The case of cambodia. KASBIT Business Journal, 6, 87–99.

Gujarati, D. N., & Porter, D. (2009). Basic Econometrics Mc Graw-Hill International Edition.

Ikechukwu, N. (2012). The impact of Money Supply on Economic Growth in Nigeria (1981-2010).

Department of Economics, Faculty of Management and Social Sciences, Cristias University, Amorji–Nike, Enugu, Nigeria.

Kasekende, L. (2008). Developing a sound banking system. IMF Seminar, Tunisia (Vol. 37).

Khan, M. S., & Senhadji, A. (2002). Inflation, financial deepening and economic growth. In Banco de Mexico Conference on Macroeconomic Stability, Financial Markets and Economic Development. 12(13).

Kiptui, M. C. (2014). Determinants of Interest Rate Spread: Some Empirical Evidence from Kenya’s Banking Sector. International Research Business, 7(11), 94.

Lozeau, B. (2007). The Effects of Population Growth on Economic Performances in China and India.

Brussels. Journal of International Studies, 4, 1–8.

Mallik, G., & Chowdhury, A. (2001). Inflation and economic growth: evidence from four south Asian countries. Asia-Pacific Development Journal, 8(1), 123–135.

Meyer, D., & Shera, A. (2017). The impact of remittances on economic growth: An econometric model.

EconomiA, 18(2), 147–155.

Mishkin, F. S. (2007). The economics of money, banking, and financial markets. Pearson education.

Museru, M., Toerien, F., & Gossel, S. (2014). The impact of aid and public investment volatility on economic growth in Sub-Saharan Africa. World Development, 57, 138–147.

Nasir, I., & Saima, N. (2010). Investment, inflation and economic growth nexus.

Ogunmuyiwa, M. S., & Ekone, A. F. (2010). Money supply-economic growth nexus in Nigeria. Journal of Social Sciences, 22(3), 199–204.

Ohno, K. (2005). Tojyo-koku Nippon no Ayumi: Edo kara Heisei madeno Keizai Hatten (The Path Traveled by Japan as a Developing Country: Economic Growth from Edo to Heisei). Yuhikaku, Tokyo.

14

N. Rehman, M. Kashif Khurshid, A. Saleem

Olusegun, A. A., Ganiyu, S. O., & Oluseyi, A. A. (2013). The impact of financial development on economic growth. American Journal of Business and Management, 2(4), 347-356.

Parvathamma, G. L. (2014). A review on inflation in India cause, its impact, trends and measures to control. Indian Journal of Applied Research, 4(9).

Saleem, F., Zahid, A., Shoaib, B., Mohamood, M., & Nayab, S. (2013). Impact of inflation and economic growth on foreign direct investment: evidence from Pakistan. Interdisciplinary Journal of Business Research, 4(9), 236–244.

Sultan, P. (2008). Trade, industry and economic growth in Bangladesh. Journal of Economic Cooperation, 29(4), 71–92.

Tan, C. J. K. (2012). International Trade and economic growth: Evidence from Singapore. University of Columbia.

Yakubu, Z., & Affoi, A. Y. (2014). An analysis of commercial banks’ credit on economic growth in Nigeria. Research Journal of Economic Theory, 6(2), 11–15.

Younus, S. (2013). Nexus among Output, Inflation and Private Sector Credit in Bangladesh PN0710.

Naila Rehman is a Lecturer at Punjab Group of Colleges Summundri Campus since 2012. She did her MS in Business Administration with specializations in the field of finance from National University of Modern Languages Islamabad. Her research is related to national and international Economics and Finance.

Muhammad Kashif Khurshid is a Lecturer at National University of Modern Languages in the Department of Management Science. He did his MS in the field of Business Administration with specialization in Finance from Mohammad Ali Jinnah University. Currently, he is pursuing a Ph.D. at GC University Faisalabad. His researches are in the fields of Corporate Governance and Corporate Finance.

Aamer Saleem is an accounts officer at Children Hospital Faisalabad. He did his MBA in the field of Finance from GC University Faisalabad. Currently, he is pursuing an MS in Business Administration at Riphah International University Islamabad.

Note: The information and data in this article are drawn from the Master’s Thesis of Naila Rehman, entitled “Financial and Economic Sector Indicators for Economic Advancement in Eight Asian” submitted to the National University of Modern Languages (NUML), Islamabad, Pakistan, 2016.

Trademarks Disclaimer: All products names including trademarks™ or registered® trademarks mentioned in this article are the property of their respective owners, using for identification and educational purposes only. Use of them does not imply any endorsement or affiliation.

*Corresponding author (M. Kashif Khurshid). Tel: +92-300-9650054 E-mail: kashif041@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11E http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11E.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

15

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11F

INNOVATIVE APPROACH AND STRATEGY FOR EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE MANAGEMENT OF TRADE ENTERPRISES M.S. Rakhmanova a

a*

, V.V. Kryukov

a

Vladivostok State University of Economics and Service, 41, Gogol Street, Vladivostok, RUSSIA

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 29 April 2019 Received in revised form 08 July 2019 Accepted 26 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

The article outlines the methodological aspects of the formation of the strategy of employee incentive management in a trading organization. It justifies the necessity of improving the methodological approach to the formation of the employee incentive strategy in order to use it in the activities of commercial establishments. This Keywords: methodological approach is based on a systematic approach to the Incentive management; formation of a personnel motivation strategy and is based on the Personnel management formation and evaluation of performance indicators of business strategy; Trade enterprises processes of a trade enterprise.

A methodological tool for the employee; Business formation of staff incentive management strategy in commercial processes of trade enterprises has been developed and improved, namely: the business enterprises. processes of the top-level personnel and auxiliaries of trade bodies, business processes performance review to determine the orientation and to estimate the efficiency of measures aimed at improving management of employee engagement of a commercial enterprise; evaluation method for incentive system through business processes performance assessment. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION Within a market economy, the enterprises that have a number of competitive advantages can function effectively. Competitive advantages, in turn, can be provided by an effective system of personnel management of a company. The commercial enterprise performance directly depends on the retail sales results, which can be realized only if the corporate personnel’s best practice. One of the main criteria affecting the performance of staff is engaged in performing targets and achieving high results.

Managing the engagement of a trading enterprise usually involves a number of problems associated with a choice of incentive tools. At the same time, employees performance efficiency in commercial establishments has the greatest effect on the company’s profit and other indicators of business performance. The problem of developing tools for managing the employee incentive of *Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

1

trading companies is of great relevance.

In view of the foregoing, the relevant objective is to formulate methods for managing employee incentive of a commercial enterprise.

2. THE DEGREE OF SCIENTIFIC DEVELOPMENT OF THE PROBLEM The theoretical aspects of the consideration of the concept “incentive” have a serious scientific basis. Foreign scientists F. Taylor, K. Alderfer, D. Adams, H. Heckhausen, D. McGregor, A. Maslow, D. McKlelland, F. Herzberg, V. Vrum, F. Skinner, Porter-Lowler Russian scientists such as V.Aseev, V. Vilyunas, V. Kovalev, A. Leontiev, P. Simonov, D. Uznadze and others contributed to the study of the problem of employee engagement [1-3]. There was a great deal of research in this area, but the topic as before the transition to a market economy and currently is one of the most unexplored and undeveloped in practical terms.

Many Russian and foreign authors have written on the topic of personnel policy development and personnel management strategies in the organization, as well as management of employee engagement. Among foreign ones, we can single out M. Armstrong, R. Atkinson, G. Becker, S. Bir, A. Smith; among domestic authors, T. Bazarov, A. Kibanov, B. Genkin, S. Shekshnya, V. Dyatlov, I. Ansov and others [4-7].

The studies of the processes of functioning and development of the services market, including trade enterprises, are reflected in the works by foreign and domestic scientists I. Ansoff, I. Blanc, N. Voskolovich, E. Zhiltsov, I. Sergeev, T. Nerovnya, R. Kouz , D. Edelev, Z. Klukovich, O.Radina, F. Kotler, J.J. Lamben, J. Atkinson, R. Fatkhutdinov, A. Sheremet and others [8-10].

The problems of formation and development of retail trade are considered in the scientific investigations by B. Berman, R. Varley, B. Weitz, L. Dashkov, V. Egorov, J. Zhalle, E. Karpenko, A. Krie, V. Larionova, M. Levy , L. Olkhova, V. Pambukhchiyants, S. Sysoeva, J. Fernie, J. Evans [11, 12].

The works by V. Abchuk, N. Vasilyeva, A. Kramarev, A. Monin, V. Pertsiy, I. Sinyaeva, V. Radayev, O. Roy and others are concerned with the areas of increasing the efficiency of trade enterprises, as well as the methods of ensuring their development.

The scientific aspects of the development and implementation of the strategies for the functioning of retail chains are considered in the works by M. Amirkhanov, A. Babich, Y. Bazhenov, O. Blinov, V. Gruzinov, N. Yevstafiev, R. Shafiev, and others. Despite significant contributions to the theory of trading enterprise development, in the works of the above economists contain many controversial and contentious issues.

By reference to the goals and objectives of the study, the paper surveys the scholarly literature surrounding the methods for corporate performance review. Many authors covered this issue in their scientific works, among them are N.P. Belyatsky, N.I. Kabushkin, R.S. Sedegov, N.I. Goryachko, G. K. Popov, T.H. Meleshko, G. B. Shishko, V.V. Kurilova, L.I. Lazar, V.K. Tarasov [7-14]. Such close attention to the issue of developing potential staff assessment tools is due to the need of this process in the practical work of most companies since the unprofitability and under-productibility of many domestic and foreign enterprises require full implementation of human capacity.

2

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

However, despite the large amount of work dealing with various aspects of managing the personnel engagement of trade enterprises, we have to state that this problem is not well understood and requires being further discussed.

3. THEORETICAL AND METHODOLOGICAL PROVISIONS The implementation of the strategic business objectives is largely predetermined by the efficiency of the use of personnel capacity and the level of its engagement. Therefore, a significant role in the corporate strategy is played by personnel engagement strategy. The engagement of the personnel of the enterprise consists of material and non-material incentives, both of which are of great importance and affect the performance of employees [15-16].

A key aspect in improving the working efficiency of the enterprise is the employee incentive, and the most important resource in the organization’s activities is the human resource [17].

The result of the company’s personnel engagement is the management of the employee behavior and as a result the achievement of certain indicators of working activity [18].

The strategic approach to managing business incentivization is to create a sustainable competitive advantages of the enterprise, by developing the employees’ awareness of their own efficiency and encouraging them to increase the efficiency [19].

The employee incentive management strategy is a unifying model of actions aimed at forming the set of requirements for employees to attain the goals and the level of their efficiency, as well as the actions aimed at encouraging employees to achieve the desired level of efficiency.

Based on the analysis of the works by domestic and foreign authors to the interpretation of the term “incentive”, the following definition of the term “employee incentive” is proposed. We will understand “employee incentive” as an external impact or internal self-inducement, encouraging the employee to the actions necessary to achieve the expected results.

The incentive should be closely associated with the performance indicators of the business processes of the organization since the business processes efficiency directly reflects the performance of each employee of the enterprise in particular and the enterprise on the whole, which depends on the effectiveness of the employee incentive system. With reference to the above, a methodical approach to the formation of employee incentive management strategy is reflected in Figure 1.

The developed methods make it possible to effectively determine the main indicators of the company’s personnel activity in order to formulate a strategy for encouraging employees to increase their own efficiency.

When forming employee incentive management strategy, it is proposed to take into account the business processes of each of the elements of the organizational structure, as well as the target indicators of employees’ activities.

Based on the strategies formation [20-22], to formulate employee incentive management strategy that takes into account, first and foremost, the elements of the organizational structure, business processes and the main target indicators of each of the elements has been developed. *Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

3

Figure 1: Methodical Approach to the Formation of the Management Strategy of the Corporate Employee Engagement.

4. METHOD TOLLS OF THE FORMATION OF THE STRATEGY OF PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT OF TRADE ENTERPRISES Method tools for the formation of the strategy for corporate employee incentive management include the described business processes of the top-level, mid-level and auxiliary managers of trade bodies, the indicators for business processes efficiency assessment, allowing to determine the orientation and evaluate the effectiveness of measures aimed at improving corporate employee incentive management efficiency.

To assess human capacity within the framework of this methodology, a method of expert evaluation is proposed, because the focus, in this case, is on the level of corporate employee engagement. The most effective method for assessing this indicator is the expert evaluation. For evaluation, it is proposed to determine the basic requirements for each of the rank, the criterion weight used for each of the criteria and to apply an expert assessment method. According to the methodology, the assessment of human resources will also include quantitative methods, namely, an assessment of the personnel turnover rate, which will allow determining the fixability of employees in the workplace and the main problems of the work of the corporate employees for further adjusting to the company’s personnel management system.

In order to form a corporate employee incentive management strategy, it was proposed to describe the business processes inherent in each element of the company’s organizational structure.

To form business processes related to a particular hierarchical layer in a company, it is necessary to describe the organizational structure of the trade organization and the business processes inherent

4

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

in each element. The chart of the interconnection of groups of business processes by structural units is represented in Figure 2.

Figure 2: The Chart of Interrelation of Business Processes Levels with Hierarchy Levels.

Working out a registry of processes is one of the main stages of building a methodology based on organization business processes. To set up the registry, it is essential to decide on the processes classification. The following business processes are distinguished for a commercial enterprise: basic, supporting, managerial. The basic ones include purchase, delivery, storage, sale; supporting – administrative support, legal support, accounting, staffing; managerial – strategic management, financial management, marketing management. The scheme of the interrelation of groups of business processes with links of hierarchy and objectives is shown in Figure 3.

The chart in Figure 3 clearly reflects the interrelation of links of hierarchy with business processes and their results, which allows defining the goals and objectives of the positions of a certain level of organizational structure for further developing employee performance indicators.

The proposed methodology is based on key business processes of the organization, however, to assess the business process, it is necessary to use indicators that determine the effectiveness of business process implementation. These indicators can be grouped into five classes: indicators of performance, cost, time, quality, fragmentation, and mixed indicators. For the above-described groups, it is possible to define a number of specific indicators to assess the performance of the business process. Table 1 shows the relationship between the goals of business processes with possible performance evaluation.

*Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

5

Business processes of top management Financial management

Strategic management

Law compliance within corporate operations

Improving the competitiveness of an organization

Mid-level managers

Administrative support

Accounting

Procurement of personnel

Formation of reporting for the parties concerned

Organization of a high performing team

Business processes of lower management

Maintaining of continuous working of sales outlets

Lower-level managers

Delivery

Storage

Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units

Optimization of financial activities of a company

Business processes targets of middle management

Increasing the publicity in sales outlets

Legal support

Business processes of middle management

Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units

Marketing management

Sale Realization of products

Business processes targets of lower management

Purchase

Business processes targets of top management

Top-level managers

Figure 3: The Chart of Interrelation of Groups of Business Processes and Goals with Hierarchy Links

Based on the above, it can be concluded that each of the goals of the business process has a corresponding indicator. Table 2 illustrates the relationship between the goals of business processes and possible performance evaluation .

6

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

Table 1: The interrelation of Groups of Indicators with Possible Specific Indicators of Business Processes.

Group of Indicators Performance indicators Cost parameters Time indices Quality data Fragmentation indicators

Indicators Turnover of commodities, gross revenue, profit, etc.

Sales value, cost of delivery, etc.

Operation period, service process duration, etc.

Customer experience, re-sorting percentage, etc.

Fragmentation rate

Table 2: The Relationship of Business Processes with Possible Performance Evaluation.

Business process Purchase Delivery Storage Strategic management Financial management

Goal Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units Improving the competitiveness of an organization Optimization of financial activities of a company

Administrative support

Maintaining of continuous working of sales outlets

Accounting

Formation of reporting for the parties concerned

Provision with personnel

Organization of a high performing team

Marketing management

Increasing the publicity in sales outlets

Legal support

Law compliance within corporate operations

Sale

Realization of products

Group of indicators Business processes character; business processes fragmentations; business processes worth Business processes worth; business processes fragmentations Business processes worth; business processes time periods; business processes fragmentations; business processes character business processes fragmentations; business processes character Business processes effectiveness; business processes character; business processes worth; business processes fragmentations Business processes worth; business processes character; business processes fragmentations business processes fragmentations; business processes character Business processes effectiveness; business processes character; business processes fragmentations

Thus, it is possible to determine the performance targets of the employees of each link . The distribution of responsibility between structural units is carried out taking into account the organizational structure of the company and the tasks facing them.

Each business process has its own owner. It is an official. To determine a business process owner, we recommend using the landscape model.

Table 3 shows the relationship between goals and indicators of business processes and those responsible for their implementation. Each of the officials is responsible for a certain performance in accordance with the organizational structure, which ultimately leads to the fact that each of the employees from the owner of the business process to the contractor is included in the purposeful achievement of the strategic goals of the business process.

*Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

7

Table 3: The Relationship of Goals and Business Processes Indicators and Those Being Responsible for Their Implementation Aims of Business Processes Sales targets of outlet spot

Organization of high performing team

Providing financial data reporting and security assistance Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units

Indicator Turnover plan performance percentage, personal goods turnover, absence of visitors’ complaints about ethical conduct Turnover rate of personnel, absence of visitors’ complaints about ethical conduct Negative representation of shortage of money and goods Turnover plan performance

Employee responsible Director, senior salesman, sales clerk, sales advisor

Director, a senior salesman

Director, senior salesman, sales clerk Director, senior salesman

Based on the key performance indicators, a set of measures is developed to stimulate employees to increase efficiency. Incentive measures, the development of which is based on key performance indicators of employees, will increase the level of interest in the performance of indicators and affect the performance of employees.

Table 4: The Relationship of the Objectives of Possible Business Processes and the Methods of Employee Incentive The rank of organizational structure Top-level manager

Business process

Goal

Examples of activities

Purchasing

Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units

Marketing management

Increasing the publicity in sales outlets

Legal support

Law compliance within corporate operations Improving the competitiveness of an organization

Percentage of sales volume, bonus deprivation for a low percentage of implementation of specific positions, etc.

Percentage of outturn volume; bonus for achieving the planned conversion rate; the percentage of sales volume to new customers, bonus for the unique idea of a marketing project, etc.

Incentive payments in the absence of internal corporate violations, etc.

Strategic management

Financial management Mid-level manager

8

Maintenance and supply

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

Optimization of financial activities of a company Maintaining of continuous working of sales outlets

Bonus for the performance of planned increase of organization’s competitiveness relative to last year; fixing of a minimum percentage of competitiveness growth, the application of sanctions in case of failure, competition for the best idea of strategic development of the company, etc.

Percentage of company profits; bonus for planned cost reduction; bonuses for reduction of accounts receivable, etc.

Sanctions in case of interruption of a sales outlet operation; bonus for reducing the costs of maintenance and supply, etc.

Table 4: The Relationship of the Objectives of Possible Business Processes and the Methods of Employee Incentive (continue) The rank of organizational structure Mid-level manager

Business process

Goal

Examples of activities

Business accounting

Formation of reporting for the parties concerned Organization of a high performing team

Applying sanctions in case of an error in accounting report, etc.

Provision with personnel

Lower-level manager

Delivery

Keeping of assortment of goods in shopping units

Storage Sales

Sales of products

Sales volume percentage; reduced staff turnover bonus; application of sanctions for low performance in personnel attestation, “Best Team” competition, etc.

Bonus for accomplishment of the planned indicator on the volume of delivered goods; application of sanctions for rejects at sales outlets, bonus deprivation for defective goods; “Best Team” competition, etc.

Sales volume percentage; percentage of sales of a specific product; bonus for overfulfilment of minimum sales, “Best Team” competition, etc.

Effectively developed system of business processes, goals and indicators provides a clear vision of key performance indicators of the corporate employees. Table 4 presents the relationship between the objectives of business processes and the methods of employee engagement.

The employee incentive system, which can be considered to be effective, encourages the employee to the necessary actions of the company. The main criterion for the effectiveness of any of their functions performed by an employee is the achievement of the objectives of the business process, and as a consequence, the achievement of the strategic goals of the company. The result of each employee’s activity is not assessed by the number of operations performed, but by the level of achievement of the goal and the related business process.

So, the described method of forming a strategy for engaging the personnel of a commercial enterprise suggests that practically each of the methods is effective if used with a suitable employee and as an incentive to fulfill the corresponding indicator of the employee’s activity.

5. THE TECHNOLOGY OF FORMATION OF CORPORATE EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE MANAGEMENT STRATEGY The technology of corporate employee incentive management is based on a system of personnel performance indicators and is particularly suitable for use in trade enterprises since this industry always assumes a number of measurable performance indicators for retail personnel. So, the technology of forming the strategy for managing employee engagement of a commercial enterprise is a sequence of stages, reflected in Figure 4 .

*Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

9

1 Evaluation of corporate people and level of engagement

2 Formation of business processes in the context of an existing organizational structure of an enterprise 3 Development of individual performance system

3.1 Formation and analysis of evaluation of effectiveness of business processes 3.2 Division of responsibility for accomplishment of indicator values

4 Employee incentive oriented arrangements to improve performance efficiency

5 Review of correlation of incentive measures and result estimates Figure 4: Technology of Formation of Strategy of Corporate Employee Incentive Management.

The first stage of the process of forming the strategy for managing corporate personnel engagement is to assess the personnel potential of the enterprise. This stage is inherent in almost all methods of formation of personnel strategies since the assessment of human capacity will allow determining the main problem areas in the work of personnel. Accordingly, it will greatly simplify the determination of the need for the formation of employee incentive management strategy.

The second stage of the process of formation of a trading enterprise motivation management strategy is the formation of business processes in the context of the existing organizational structure of the enterprise. The formation of employee incentive management strategy based on a business process system is new and makes it possible to develop a system of incentive measures for staff based on the features of business processes inherent in each of the elements of the organizational structure.

When forming this strategy, the main parameter of the choice of incentive measures will be the involvement of an employee to a certain link in the hierarchy, each of which, in turn, fulfills certain business processes. Accordingly, the formation of business processes is a key aspect of this methodology.

The third stage of strategy formation technology is the development of a system of employee performance indicators. These indicators will determine the focus of activities to manage the incentive of employees of a trade body. Within this stage, a set of indicators has been developed to assess each of the group of employees identified in the second stage, as well as the distribution of responsibility for achieving the values of these indicators.

The fourth stage is to develop a set of measures for employee incentive management a commercial enterprise. This stage involves directly developing a motivation management strategy, based on the previous stages.

10

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

The developed technology enables to effectively determine the key performance indicators of the corporate personnel in order to form the most effective strategy for encouraging employees to increase their own efficiency.

6. CONCLUSION The scientific literature deals with various methods of forming management strategies for employee engagement in enterprises, but many of them are general and can be applied to manage employee engagement in industrial, state and other enterprises, since they do not take into account the specific features of reality, and also consider personnel management strategies and the formation of a personnel management system in general, without focusing on individual HR processes, in particular, on incentive management.

The approach is based on the concept of “employee incentive”, understood as an external influence or internal self-motivation, encouraging employees to actions that are necessary to gain the expected results. Employee engagement is closely related to the efficiency indicators of business processes of the enterprise since the efficiency of business processes directly reflects the efficiency of each employee in particular and the enterprise in general, which depends on the efficiency of the employee incentive system. The concept of “employee incentive” allows improving the method of forming the strategy for employee incentive management in commercial enterprises.

The developed methodological tools for the formation of the strategy for employees incentive management in commercial enterprises suggests the interrelation of business processes with their goals and indicators, as well as the outline of business processes of the top, middle and low levels of the hierarchy of commercial enterprises and indicators for assessing the effectiveness of business processes to determine the orientation and review effectiveness measures aimed at improving the management of employee incentive of trade enterprises. An effectively developed system of business processes, targets and indicators provide a clear vision of key performance indicators of employees.

7. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL No data is used or generated from this study.

8. THE CONFLICT OF INTERESTS The authors confirm that the presented data do not contain any conflicts of interest.

9. REFERENCES

[1] Makhortova, A. V. (2015). Evolution of Theories of Motivation. Economy and Entrepreneurship, 4(1), 654-660.

[2] Udaltsova, M. V. (2002). Theories of Motivation: Textbook. - Novosibirsk: - Ngaeiu, 59 p.

[3] Vilyunas, V. K. (2006). Psychological Mechanisms of Human Motivation: Textbook. – M.: - Nauka, 218 p.

[4] Shekshnya, S. V. (2012). Personnel Management in a Modern Organization: Study Guide.– M.: Intel, 232 p.

[5] Travin, V. V. & Dyatlov, V. A. (1998). Enterprise Personnel Management: Study Guide. – M .: Delo, 356 p. *Corresponding author (M.S. Rakhmanova). E-mail: Marina.Rakhmanova@vvsu.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11F http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11F.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.141

11

[6] Rakhmanova, M. S. (2018). Methodology for Assessing Human Resource in Large Enterprises.

Azimuth of Scientific Research: Economics and Management, 1, 219 – 223.

[7] Rakhmanova, M. S. (2017). The Methods of Evaluating the Personnel Strategy Effectiveness in Large Enterprises. Azimuth of Scientific Research: Economics and Management, 2, 231 – 235.

[8] Wilson, I. (2008). Strategic Marketing: Situations, Examples: Tutorial. M.: - Unity, 471 p.

[9] Radina, O. I. (2011). Service Activities: Social Services: Textbook. – Shakhty: - SRSUES, 116 p.

[10] Sheremet, A. D. & Negashev, E. V. (2013). Methods of Financial Analysis of the Activities of Commercial Organizations: Practical Guide for Students. – M.: - Infra – М, 208 p.

[11] Sysoeva, S. V. & Buzukov, E. A. (2012). Category Management. The Course on Retail Assortment Management: Textbook. – SP.: - Peter, 176 p.

[12] Pambukhchiyants, V. K. (1998). Organization, Technology and Design of Trade Enterprises: Textbook for Students of Higher and Secondary Specialized Educational Institutions. M.: Marketing, 223 p.

[13] Belyatsky, N. P., & Maksimchuk, A. I. (2017). Intellectual Management Techniques: Manual for Students of Institutions of Higher Education in Economic Specialties. Minsk: - Adukatsya, 255 p.

[14] Minenko, K. A., & Petruk, G. V. (2015). The influence of external factors on small business in food industry. International Journal of Applied and Basic Research, 8, 937-941 [15] Mitrofanova, E. A. (2008). Development of the System of Motivation and Incentive of Performance the Personnel of an Organization: Theory, Methodology, Practice: Thesis for PhD in Economics.

341p.

[16] Scheglov, E. V. (2013). Performance Incentives – the Main Tool for Managing the Workforce.

Bulletin of Personnel Policy, Agricultural Education and Innovation, 4.

[17] Soldatov, V. V. (2006). Personnel Development Strategy. Personnel Service and Personnel, 6, 28-32.

[18] Kuznetsova, N. V. (2002). Algorithm for the Development of Personnel Policy of the Enterprise: Guide to Personnel Management. М, 2, 45 p.

[19] Izhbulatova, O. V. (2017). Formation and Implementation of Personnel Strategy of the Enterprise.

Personnel Management, 1, 70-72.

[20] Koshcheyeva, A. I. (2008). Development of Personnel Strategy of the Company. Personnel Management, 4.

[21] Brovko, P. M., & Petruk, G. V. (2017). Strategic Management of Development of the Military-Industrial Complex Enterprises with the Use of Dual Technologies under the Resource-Based Approach. Экономические и социальные перемены No 3 (45) 2016, 95.

[22] Development of Personnel Strategy in Seven Steps [Electronic resource] // Access Mode: http://Www.Elitarium.Ru/Razrabotka_Kadrovojj_Strategii_V_Semi_Shagakh.

Dr.Rakhmanova Marina Sergeevna is an Associate Professor of Economics and Management, Head of the Center for Research, Projects, and Programs of Vladivostok State University of Economics and Service. She is a Candidate of Economic Sciences. She is a specialist in Strategic Analysis of Organizations, Municipalities, and Territories.

Professor Dr.Kryukov Vladimir Vasilyevich is Professor and an Advisor to the Rector of Vladivostok State University of economics and service. He is a member of the Public Expert Council for the Development of the Information Society under the Governor of Primorsky Krai.

12

M.S. Rakhmanova, V.V. Kryukov

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11G

INFORMATION STATE AS A SOCIAL COMMUNICATION: SERVICE AND NETWORK MODELS a

Danila A. Kutovoy , Olga A. Andreeva a

a*

Department of Theory and History of State and Law, Taganrog Institute of Management and Economics, Taganrog, RUSSIA

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 07 May 2019 Received in revised form 14 July 2019 Accepted 23 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

The article is devoted to the analysis of social interactions arising in the conditions of development of information and communication technologies containing risks of social and political instability in the relations between the state and civil society. Service and network models of the state as social communication are replacing the administrative and command management system. It is revealed that communications in the system of power relations become a catalyst for the development of social relations in the information society, which requires a comprehensive interdisciplinary analysis, as the sociology of law, and the theory of state and law.

Keywords: Information society; Social information communication; Digital democracy; Public dialogue; Public administration; Civil society.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION Informatization of social relations has an impact not only on the daily life of people, but also management processes at all levels of public power, including the institution of the state, which under their influence are transformed functions, which leads to a change in its nature and role in social processes. If the criteria of the social state are violated, formal legal equality and the rule of law are deformed, and then there is a gap between the law and the law, which ultimately leads to the risk of distortion of the legal nature of power. On the one hand, the introduction of information technologies has increased the creative potential of mankind, and, on the other, has brought new risks associated with the complexity of relations between the state and society, which is not yet clearly defined in modern Humanities, as, indeed, their consequences.

The idea of scientific research is to reflect on the process of transformation of the essence of the state in the context of changing its functions and defining the boundaries of interaction with civil society in the new virtual reality containing the risks of technological innovation. The actualization of knowledge about the impact of information and communication technologies on power relations between the state network and citizens allows forming new methods and approaches to the analysis of *Corresponding author (Olga A. Andreeva). E-mail: d.a.kutovoy@yandex.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11G http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11G.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.142

1

the dynamics of social reality in order to minimize possible areas of risks, conflicts and confrontations in this system. The relationship between the state and civil society in different periods of history has had a significant impact on its functions, which at the same time presupposed the personalization of power and the parallel existence of social anarchism. However, the interpretation of the functions of the state by various social groups, in the end, were theoretically focused on the Symphony of relations between the government and society, and in practice led to the risks of socio-political conflicts and revolutions. It can be argued that every major technological or organizational decision entails changes in the paradigm of public interest, containing a certain degree of risk.

Risk activity arises and develops based on increasing opportunities of the person and society within the framework of the achieved scientific and technical progress. When assessing the risks of technological innovations that affect the relationship between the state-network and citizens, two variables should be noted: the subjective probability of loss and the actual amount of gain, but the amount of gain does not have a significant impact on its perception. It is known that the more winnings and less risk, the better, this explains the fact that the risk is not only a social category, but also a psychological phenomenon. Social achievements are not a guaranteed contribution to progress; they require constant support and development of the space, the so-called breakthrough technologies, which are usually based on legitimate risks. The social environment is heterogeneous, but is constantly outraged by certain risky enterprises affecting the interests of citizens. When the state unilaterally changes the rules of the game in tax, administrative, labor, etc. regulation, it increases the risk of social instability.

2. METHOD The methodological paradigm of the research is the theory of H. Luman on social systems as communication, in which power is seen as "code-driven communication", consisting of universally valid rules and norms for the ordering of social reality. Modern practices and strategies of interaction between the government and society are communicative in nature, so they cannot rely on the universally recognized rights and freedoms of man and citizen. In addition, The more intense the socio-political dynamics of the situation in the world, the more important for millions of people acquire communication, such as television or rather the Internet, forming public opinion, the spiritual values of the modern world, determining the attitude of the population to various events.

Komissarov (2011) believes that "new information technologies seriously raise the issue of information security of any country and any person". Consequently, we can talk about a new form of interstate Association, which is based on non-interference in public relations and guarantees of free use of the Internet.

3. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 3.1 THE IMPACT OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES ON POWER RELATIONS BETWEEN THE STATE AND SOCIETY The fundamental principle of the state in the information age is the "freedom of interaction" between the state, its structures and civil society, which allows realizing the interests of the

2

Danila A. Kutovoy, Olga A. Andreeva

participants in these relations by adapting virtual reality. Nevostrueva (2008) writes, «social communication is a special structural unit of General communication, reflecting the relationship and interaction of organized in the structure of the basic social institutions and social practices of human society." Therefore, social communication can be represented as a system of objective relations, transforming in the process of socio-economic, political and other changes, which are based on information and communication technologies and theoretical concepts of relations between the state and society.

One of the problems of sociological analysis of interactions between government and civil society, both in science and in politics, is the dialectics of objective and subjective in the content of virtual reality and its impact on public consciousness and human activity. The flow of pure, refined information received by the media often replaces the need to think, reflect, comprehend social transformations in order to make decisions and take responsibility for them. Romashov and Panchenko (2017) wrote that "in its current state, the Internet system is as objective as objective social phenomena such as Economics, politics, education, law." Thus, in the information society, social interactions are gradually moving into the virtual sphere, which contains significant social and political consequences for society. The first virtual reality model in human history was myths and religious beliefs as a universal response to the instability and unpredictability of human existence.

Virtual reality does not exist by itself, the three-dimensional model of the world has a price, only for those who produce and consume it. Expressed in a stream of pure information, its price is many times lower than the "cost" of real things, in this context it becomes a refuge for the poor, as well as religion.

The institutions of the state and civil society included in power relations are interested in their informatization, which leads to the expansion of opportunities for both self-organization of civil society and democratization of governance processes, which leads to a change in the functions of the state. Such technologies create the ground for new forms of relations containing risks of expectations of various preferences from the state without taking into account the objective reality and the nature of relations between the government and civil society. These relationships are largely based on communication and virtualization, which leads to the possibility of participation of citizens in management processes that acquire the format of dialogue, openness and availability of information about the activities of public authorities and decision-making procedures. In science, some aspects of social and political transformations bearing risks for the prognostic planning of future relations between the state and the network of citizens are being studied and, therefore, interdisciplinary studies of these processes are becoming relevant.

The service state, as a new social and political model, has the potential to overcome the inefficiency of public administration and to build an open, free from abuse of power of the state, through the formation of new legislation and the reorganization of its bodies. The transformation of the Russian state has led to a change in the paradigm of public administration, which makes its interdisciplinary study relevant.

3.2 SERVICE AND NETWORK MODEL AS A SOCIALLY ORIENTED FORM OF STATE TRANSFORMATION. In modern theoretical and legal science, there is a point of view, according to which the service *Corresponding author (Olga A. Andreeva). E-mail: d.a.kutovoy@yandex.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11G http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11G.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.142

3

model of the state is considered as a future socio-political communication, replacing the administrative and command method of management. The relationship between the state and civil society in the context of the command-and-control system was secondary, as there were no technologies to control the activities of the government by civil society. Modern information technologies help public authorities and management to respond more quickly to social needs, as the request of society for the changes necessary for its progress. Thus, the future model of relations between the state and civil society should be based on the maximum possible non-interference of the authorities in those social relations that are governed by morality and law, and the fundamental principle in the information age should be the "freedom of interaction" between them.

The state of a new type does not simply become digital, it acquires the character of the state of communication, since the primary role is not its power influence, but interaction with citizens and public organizations as subjects of communication in the system of power relations. Kolomiets (2017) notes, "Mass communication today is the establishment of relations through centralized, decentralized and public dissemination of meaning – generating messages." Consequently, the problematic field of social interactions between citizens and the state is expanding, which becomes the subject of legal relations, providing services (service model of the state), then contributing to the self-organization of the population.

In the network model of the state, the main role is given to the interaction of state structures with business entities and local governments in order to establish information exchange. In the Russian Federation, the governing bodies and local self-government are not yet independent, as their activities are not legally and financially fully ensured. The identity of local self-government in the Russian Federation largely depends on the geography of the country, its enormous size, which does not allow it to create a civil society without its decentralization; secondly, it is a historically tradition of centrism, which should become the basis for developing new political technologies, improving governance and local self-government.

In this regard, the question arises of what type of interaction should determine the process of making socially significant decisions, who are their subjects? In other words, we are talking about the formation of a new level of relations between the government and civil society. For example, in Russia there is a Civic Chamber established by federal bodies, the purpose of which is to ensure interaction between state bodies and the population regarding the country's social policy. The Civic Chamber is composed of candidates from public organizations that have an impeccable reputation, have merits to society and the state, and enjoy authority among the population. A list of their names is transmitted to the President, who appoints 40 people of his choice to the Civic Chamber.

However, in practice, the effectiveness of this artificially created body is doubtful, since it has only advisory functions and cannot influence the adoption of many important decisions. Among the people, the Civic Chamber is not popular. According to a survey conducted by the Levada Center in 2014, only 53% are aware of the existence of the Civic Chamber, and only 10% of respondents are satisfied with its activities (Feldman, 2014). The Civic Chamber is a relatively new structure in the system of Russian democracy, therefore, many measures are proposed to improve it. In particular, it is planned to attract a larger number of people to participate in the activities of the public chamber, to attract experts in certain areas to give an opinion on the policies of the authorities. It is assumed that

4

Danila A. Kutovoy, Olga A. Andreeva

through the Internet, a more effective activity of the Civic Chamber will become possible, and the participation of broad sections of the population in the decision-making process on issues of state social policy will bring Russia closer to countries with elements of direct democracy.

Such communication is based on information technologies, which, being virtual in form, have a real impact on the formation of public consciousness and social activity of citizens. In this case, the essence of the state is determined by the concept of the state of the service, which has a system of communicative influences in the form of a structured system - a network for the provision of services.

The gradual introduction of information and communication technologies in public relations is becoming a prototype of the organization of the system of public power, which is forced to ensure its functioning by providing civil society with compromise opportunities for self-development. It is possible that communication, not information, will become the basis of new forms of power relations, leading to a more effective impact on the processes of making meaningful decisions. Mikhailova (2013) wrote "Modern practice demonstrates the increasing commitment of the state model of governance through negotiations, coordination of interests, and the formation of a number of decentralized voluntary associations. The traditional Weber hierarchy gives way to decentralized relations in which complex networks, often without formalization, control all stages of the process of development and implementation of public policies and individual decisions." Consequently, a compromise in power relations between the state and civil society is possible with virtual space as a platform for communication with objective and subjective social consequences. Within the information society, virtual space is becoming a socially significant phenomenon that has changed many social interactions that existed in the past.

3.3 THE FUNCTIONS OF THE STATE IN THE STRUCTURE OF POWER RELATIONS IN THE INFORMATION SOCIETY In modern society, the tendencies of transformation of functions of the state, which becomes not only the expanded structure of management of social processes, but also the form of the organization of the social communications reflecting human needs, are outlined, becoming the catalyst of their realization. Providing state and municipal services in the conditions of informatization of public relations, it becomes a service, which leads to an imbalance between the rules of private and public law, different in form of social impact, which is unusual for the traditional understanding of the essence of the state. Tokareva (2006) wrote that "in the theory and practice of public administration there is a transition from the institutional organization of the state (government) to the organization of the management process through the delegation or expansion of powers of non-state actors (government). Therefore, the concept of governance can be described as a replacement of unilateral state actions by multilateral actions of governmental and non-governmental actors or as an attempt to manage society and the economy through collective actions and forms of regulation." Thus, in the conditions of unpredictably developing social relations, the question of their structuring interaction and the nature of internal interaction is becoming increasingly important, thus, the network model of management through the settlement of economic interests can become able to find social compromises and provide social guarantees.

Information technology has changed many types of social communication, creating a virtual *Corresponding author (Olga A. Andreeva). E-mail: d.a.kutovoy@yandex.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11G http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11G.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.142

5

space; they affect not only interpersonal relationships, but also the relationship of the individual, society and the state. By creating a new type of communication in the system of power relations, the service state allows to expand the possibility of obtaining information about the activities of state institutions, thereby expanding social contacts that affect the formation of other relations. Access to information and saving time to obtain it change social relations, making them socially oriented. One of the forms of such transformations is the formation of the service model of the state, which, on the one hand, should expand the possibilities of communication between citizens and authorities, and, on the other hand, may contain risks in the process of promoting political, economic and other interests that can disorient society.

Legal and organizational aspects of the service state, based on the use of information technologies and resources, become strategic. The more complex social relations are, the more urgent is the problem of maintaining balance and compromise between its structural elements, which requires constant development of information and communication technologies capable of stabilizing emerging conflicts and contradictions. Therefore, the role of the state in the information society can be identified with the service model, which by its nature is a complex communication that serves as the basis for the relationship between it and civil society in the developing new information formation.

4. CONCLUSION As a result of the study of the modern state as a social communication, it can be concluded that in the conditions of informatization of social relations, its primary task is to ensure the possibility of self-organization of citizens. At present, the existence of the state in the traditional sense and its competitiveness largely depends on civil activity and satisfaction with the living conditions of the population. Regulation of public relations in isolation from civil society can generate legal nihilism and social chaos, which a priori carries the risk of destabilization of power relations, reduce public interest in participating in a dialogue with the public authorities and adversely affect the development of the state as a whole.

Unlimited freedom of virtual reality contains the risks of socio-political instability and disorganization of public administration in connection with the possible gap between the interests of society and the administrative and command management system in the Russian Federation. In this case, the state, as a social communication, increasingly acquires the properties of the network, which leads to the need for a new strategy and tactics of the organization of the system of power relations.

The concept of the state is not historically unambiguous, and therefore, most accurately its essence can be described on the basis of a set of features, but in general it should be noted that the modern state acquires the functions of the service model as a form and network state that changed its content. In the context of informatization of public relations, the state is able to take into account not only the social consequences of the decisions taken, but also to predict the directions of their development in order to respond as quickly as possible to the transformation and needs of society.

5. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL No data is used or generated from this study.

6

Danila A. Kutovoy, Olga A. Andreeva

6. REFERENCES Feldman P. Y. Ensuring public participation and control in the management of modern Russia // Labor and social relations. 2014. No.7. P.51.

Kolomiets V. P. Sociology of mass communication in the society of communication abundance // Sociological research. 2017. No.6. P.6.

Komissarov S. S. Information policy of the state: the transformation in the conditions of modernization of society // Bulletin of Moscow State University of Culture and Arts. 2011. 2(40) P.42.

Lylov, A.S., Semin, А.N., & Skvortsov, Е.А. Development of Rural Areas in Russia in Terms of Program-Target Management. International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. 2019. 10(3), 335-344.

Mikhailova O. V. possibilities of the state on management of network alliances / / Public administration.

Electronic Bulletin. 2013. No. 38. P. 144.

Nevostrueva A. F. Methodological aspects of the study of social communication // News of Russian State Pedagogical University. A. I. Herzen 2008. No.73-1. P.334.

Romashov R. A., Panchenko V. Y. the relationship between material and virtual in a modern legal reality // Legal science. 2017. No. 1. P. 31.

Tokareva P. V. Theory of public administration: from hierarchical management to network management // Management Issues. 2006. No. 3. P. 8.

Danila A. Kutovoy is a post-graduate student of the Department of Theory and History of State and Law, Taganrog Institute of Management and Economics (TIM&E), Taganrog, RUSSIA. In 2015 he graduated as a laywer (specialist) from The South Federal University Rostov-on-Don. Russia. He specializes in the field of problems of the Modern Theory of State and Law in the Conditions of Informatization of Public Relations, Functions and Transformation of the Essence of Government and close topics.

Professor Dr.Olga A. Andreeva is Professor at the Department of Theory and History of State and Law, Taganrog Institute of Management and Economics(TIM&E), Taganrog, RUSSIA. She graduated from Leningrad State University, Leningrad, Soviet Union as a philosopher (specialist). She got her Doctoral degree in Philosophy. Her specializations are in the fields of History and Philosophy of Law.

*Corresponding author (Olga A. Andreeva). E-mail: d.a.kutovoy@yandex.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11G http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11G.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.142

7

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11H

DETERMINATION OF THE DIFFERENTIATED PHOTOMETRIC BODY SYSTEM RADIATORS A.A. Ashryatov a

a*

a

, S.V. Prytkov , A.O. Syromyasov

a

Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education "National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University", 430005, Saransk, ul. Bolshevik, 68, RUSSIA

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 06 May 2019 Received in revised form 25 July 2019 Accepted 31 July 2019 Available online 01 August 2019

This paper proposes a method for calculating the light distribution of a system of multi-oriented LED emitters, based on the combination of coordinates systems associated with these light sources. The algorithm is based on combining own coordinate systems of various ICs with the help of turns described in a matrix form, transition to a common spherical coordinate system as well as the addition of the forces of light corresponding to the same values of the angular coordinates. Unlike other well-known approaches, this method can be applied to emitters whose light distribution have an arbitrary symmetry or does not have it at all.

Keywords: Photometric Body; Point Light Source; Secondary Optics; Coordinate Transformations; Space, Rotations in Space.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION Several years ago, in scientific publications [1, 2, 4, 7-9], there was a certain interest in the idea of designing lighting devices (OP) assembled from several LEDs (LEDs) or LED modules (LED modules) with secondary optics with different orientations in space. This approach has two advantages. First, it allows creating a photometric body (PB) of any complexity using secondary optics with simple geometry. Secondly, by ensuring in the OP design the ability to rotate individual LEDs (LED modules), it is possible to optimize its light distribution, considering the specifics of the lighting conditions. It is worth noting that over the last decade, the range of secondary optics for street lighting has significantly expanded so that the application of this approach to the development of this category of lamps turned out to be economically unjustified; however, attempts were made. In our opinion, it remains relevant to apply this approach, firstly, to the development of transom lamps designed to illuminate railway transport facilities, as well as for industrial premises, architectural lighting of buildings and structures. Secondly, it can be used to design lighting devices implementing the “flat beam” lighting technology [10], allowing for more efficient use of light energy and eliminating “light pollution”, not dazzling vehicle drivers when illuminating the roadway [11], *Corresponding author (A.A. Ashryatov). E-mail: ashryatov@rambler.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of

Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11H http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11H.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.143

1

and more effectively providing architectural lighting. In this regard, research on the solution of the problem of finding the total angular distribution of the luminous intensity of a system of multi-oriented light sources with PBs is still relevant.

A method developed by Ashurkov and Bartsev [2] is currently known to solve this problem for round-symmetrical initial PB. Further, in the paper, a method for solving the problem is proposed, but without this limitation, that is, for asymmetric source PBs.

2. PROBLEM STATEMENT As known, the light distribution of a point source is described by the indicatrix of the luminous intensity — a function determining the dependence of the luminous intensity 𝐼(𝑒⃗) in the chosen direction. In turn, the direction can be determined by two angles in one of the systems (A, α), (B, β ) or (C, γ) [3]. From the point of view of mathematics, the structure of the indicatrix of luminous intensity is an image of the surface in a spherical coordinate system, where I plays the role of a radius, and the angular coordinates depend on the choice of the photometric system.

As a rule, the indicatrix of luminous intensity is found from measurements on a goniophotometer. The result of such experiments is presented in IESNA format [10] - in fact, in the form of a table listing the values of each of the angles with a certain step and presenting the values of the luminous intensity corresponding to each pair of such values.

[0∘

Denoted by 𝛩, 𝛷 angular coordinates in some spherical system (Figure 1), 𝛩 ∈ ; 180∘ ], 𝛷 ∈ [0∘ ; 360∘ ]

Figure 1: Angular coordinates in a spherical system Let the measurements are made in increments 𝛥𝛩 on the first and 𝛥𝛷 — on the second corner, designating: 𝛩𝑘 = 𝑘𝛥𝛩, 𝛷𝑙 = 𝑙𝛥𝛷

(1).

It is recognized that the values are known as 𝑖𝑘𝑙 = 𝐼(𝛩𝑘 , 𝛷𝑙 ),

2

A.A. Ashryatov, S.V. Prytkov, A.O. Syromyasov

(2),

where 𝑘 = 0 … 𝑁𝛩 , 𝑙 = 0 … 𝑁𝛷 , and 𝑁𝛩 = 180⁄𝛥 𝛩, 𝑁𝛷 = 360⁄𝛥 𝛷.

Consider now several light sources (IC) located at one point. The indicatrix of the light intensity for each of them is separately known and is given by equations of the form (1), (2). Moreover, all indicatrices are described in the same photometric system, for example, (𝐶, 𝛾), in which the role of the corner 𝛩 plays 𝛾, and the role of the corner 𝛷 is as C. It is also logical to assume that when measured, the steps of changing angles 𝛥𝛩 and 𝛥𝛷 are common to all light sources, although this assumption is not critical.

Sources are multi-oriented: the light distribution of each of them is described in its own coordinates system, rigidly connected with this particular source. In this case, the mutual arrangement of the IC is known, i.e. the known sequence of turns, allowing combining their coordinate systems by themselves.

The task is to find the total light distribution of the point sources described above.

Due to the non-coincidence of the coordinate systems, the directly added values 𝑖𝑘𝑙 of different sources in the corresponding grid nodes are impossible. It is required to preselect a certain common coordinate system, recalculate the functions for each source in it, and only then perform the addition.

To reduce computation, you can choose your own coordinate system of one of the ICs as a general system. The method for solving the problem will be described below, as well as the experimental setup, which prepared the input data to verify the theoretical calculations, and the comparison of the methods.

3. CALCULATION OF LIGHT DISTRIBUTION IN SPACE ASC is a function of two variables in the three-dimensional case: 𝐼 = 𝐼(𝜃, 𝜑). Corners 𝜃 ∈ [0∘ ; 180∘ ] and 𝜑 ∈ [0∘ ; 360∘ ] set the direction in a spherical coordinates system, whose beginning is combined with the IP, where I acts as a distance (Figure 1).

The transition from spherical to Cartesian coordinates is described by the equations: 𝑥 = 𝐼cos(𝜑)sin(𝜃), 𝑦 = 𝐼sin(𝜑)sin(𝜃), 𝑧 = 𝐼cos(𝜃),

(3)

and the reverse transition - formulas 𝑧

𝐼 = √𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 𝑧 2 , 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( 𝐼 ) , 𝜑 = {

𝜑 * , 𝑦 ⩾ 0, 360∘ − 𝜑 * , 𝑦 < 0,

(4)

where the auxiliary angle 𝜑0 is determined by the equation: 𝜑 * = arccos (

𝑥

√𝑥 2 +𝑦 2

)

(5)

This approach allows to correctly determine all the values of 𝜑 from the segment [0, 360∘ ].

However, it is impossible to do without considering additional conditions in the last of the formulas (4), since the range of values of any of the functions “arcsin”, “arccos” and “arctan” is equal to 180∘ .

For x = y = 0, we can assume 𝜑 = 0∘ .

Note that in the photometry system (C, γ), the value of C corresponds to the angle 𝜑, and γ *Corresponding author (A.A. Ashryatov). E-mail: ashryatov@rambler.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of

Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11H http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11H.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.143

3

(after being replaced with 360∘ − 𝛾) — corner 𝜃.

As in the two-dimensional case, to add together the forces of light emitted by ICs located at one-point O, it is required to combine the own coordinate systems of these ICs by turning around O. For example, these transformations can be specified with Euler angles. In the present study, sequential rotations around the axes are used to align the coordinate systems of 𝑂𝑥, 𝑂𝑦, 𝑂𝑧 on some angles 𝛼𝑥 , 𝛼𝑦 , 𝛼𝑧 .

Let the basis in space be formed by vectors ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑒1 = {1; 0; 0}, ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑒2 = {0; 1; 0} and ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑒3 = {0; 0; 1}.

After transformation, they will be transferred to other vectors of ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑓1 , ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑓2 , ⃗​⃗​⃗​⃗ 𝑓3 . The coordinates of these “new” vectors in the “old” basis are contained in the columns of the transition matrix M, thus fully describing the studied transformation.

If the coordinates of the same vector 𝑟⃗ in the “old” and “new” basis are contained in the columns X and Y, respectively, they are related by 𝑋 = 𝑀𝑌

(6)

For rotations around the coordinate axes of the transition matrix in the Cartesian rectangular coordinate system, they have the form as below: cos𝛼𝑦 1 0 0 𝑀𝑥 = [0 cos𝛼𝑥 −sin𝛼𝑥 ] , 𝑀𝑦 = [ 0 0 sin𝛼𝑥 cos𝛼𝑥 sin𝛼𝑦 cos𝛼𝑧 −sin𝛼𝑧 0 𝑀𝑧 = [ sin𝛼𝑧 cos𝛼𝑧 0] .

0 0 1

0 1 0

−sin𝛼𝑦 0 ], cos𝛼𝑦

(7)

If all three rotations are performed, then the final transformation will be described by a matrix. 𝑀 = 𝑀𝑥 𝑀𝑦 𝑀𝑧 .

(8)

Equations (6)-(8) are valid in the Cartesian rectangular coordinates system; nevertheless, the luminous intensities of various ICs are determined by the angular coordinates in a spherical system.

To combine both approaches and calculate the total light distribution of n multi-oriented sources located at the same point, the following algorithm can be used: Describe the PB of all light sources by specifying functions of 𝐼𝑘 (𝛩, 𝛷) in its own coordinate systems. Here 𝑘 = 1, 𝑛 is the source number, but 𝛩, 𝛷 represents angular coordinates in its system.

Choose a common coordinate system making the addition of light occur. Further, the angular coordinates in the general system are denoted by 𝜃, 𝜑.

For each IC, describe the angles of 𝛼𝑥 (𝑘), 𝛼𝑦 (𝑘), 𝛼𝑧 (𝑘), with the help of which there will be a combination of one’s own system with common matrices corresponding to them and find the transition matrix 𝑀(𝑘) = 𝑀𝑥 (𝑘) ⋅ 𝑀𝑦 (𝑘) ⋅ 𝑀𝑧 (𝑘).

For all ICs, find the connection between 𝜃, 𝜑, and 𝛩, 𝛷. To this end, a formal unit vector is introduced as 𝑒⃗, the coordinates of which in the “new” (common) system are entered in the column 𝑌 = 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑜𝑛(cos𝜑sin𝜃,sin𝜑sin𝜃,cos𝜃). In the "old" (own) system, its coordinates are listed in the

4

A.A. Ashryatov, S.V. Prytkov, A.O. Syromyasov

column 𝑋 = 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑜𝑛(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧), with some other kind and already depending on variables 𝛩, 𝛷. Insofar as 𝑀(𝑘) – this is the transition matrix from its own Cartesian coordinate system to the general one, then the connection between 𝑋(𝛩, 𝛷) and 𝑌(𝜃, 𝜑) will be set based on the formula (6): 𝑋 = 𝑀(𝑘)𝑌 . Through calculating 𝑀(𝑘)𝑌(𝜃, 𝜑) and finding x, y, z, you can go from Cartesian coordinates to spherical coordinates in your own system using formula (4). Thus, the desired connection will be found 𝛩 = 𝑇𝑘 (𝜃, 𝜑), 𝛷 = 𝐹𝑘 (𝜃, 𝜑).

(9).

To simplify the calculations in (4) you can immediately consider 𝐼 = 1.

Given the Equation (9), the desired light distribution is obtained by the function 𝐼(𝜃, 𝜑) = 𝐼1 (𝑇1 (𝜃, 𝜑), 𝐹1 (𝜃, 𝜑)) + ⋯ + 𝐼𝑛 (𝑇𝑛 (𝜃, 𝜑), 𝐹𝑛 (𝜃, 𝜑))

(10)

In the two-dimensional case, the combination of its own and common coordinate systems is obtained by simply replacing 𝛷 with 𝜑 − 𝜑0 , where 𝜑0 is the angle at which your own system turns. In this regard, the question arises, “Is it possible to find such angles 𝜃0 and 𝜑0 , dependent on 𝛼𝑥 , 𝛼𝑦 , 𝛼𝑧 ? What are angular variables 𝛩, 𝛷 and 𝜃, 𝜑 that will be connected by the same ratios 𝜑 = 𝛷 − 𝜑0 , 𝜃 = 𝛩 − 𝜃0 for any values of 𝛩, 𝛷? As shown in [1], the answer to this question is negative. Therefore, it is necessary to find (10) after the additional interpolation stage [5].

4. EVALUATION OF THE CORRECTNESS OF THE METHOD WORK The specified algorithm was implemented in a free package for mathematical calculations Octave. To record commands and expressions in GNU Octave, a functional high-level language similar to MatLab is used.

The real data necessary for assessing the correctness of the method was obtained during a goniophotometric experiment. In Figure 2, the LED ICs participating in the experiment is shown. The first source (IC 1) is the kososvet, made based on a Feron 3602 LB-24 MR16 LED lamp. The second source (IC 2) is a comparable in power LED accent lamp with round symmetrical light distribution.

The distribution of luminous intensity was measured under normal conditions by means of the goniophotometric complex GO2000A [12], including: o Goniometer GO2000A (the range of rotation in the horizontal and vertical planes: ±180, the accuracy of setting the rotation angle: 0.1); o Photometer ID-1000 based on silicon photodiode, corrected for the function V(λ), accuracy class L; o Power supply DPS1060.

All photometric data used in further calculations represent the arithmetic average of the results of five measurements.

*Corresponding author (A.A. Ashryatov). E-mail: ashryatov@rambler.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of

Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11H http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11H.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.143

5

Figure 2: Light sources used in the photometric experiment: 1 - kososvet, 2 - LED lamp Photometry was carried out in the Cγ system. The measurement step was conducted for plane C was 2.5, and for the plane γ - 1. The experimental PB of each IC is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Photometric bodies of sources 1 and 2, obtained from the measurements IC 1 was installed to measure the total light distribution of these sources, so that its geometrical axis was parallel to the photometric axis, and the orientation for IC 2 was determined by a sequence of rotations of its geometrical axis: around the Ox axis by 46, then around the Oz axis by 190. The overall coordinate system was associated with the IC 1. Of course, the angles are arbitrary. Total PB obtained as a result of measurements is shown in Figure 4.

Subsequently, the total light distribution was calculated. The photometric body of IC 2 was rotated about the axis Ox by 46, then around the axis Oz by 190. The overall coordinate system was associated with the IC 1. The total PB obtained from the calculation is shown in Figure 5.

The accuracy criterion was the relative error in calculating the total luminous intensity from the two integrated circuits, compared with its experimental values of Ipq. The calculated and experimental data were compared only in the area where Ipq = Imax/2.

Here, Imax represents the highest intensity of the measured total luminous. Such a restriction allows us not to consider regions not actually covered by IP. On the other hand, these areas are not of interest from a technical point of view and the relative error can increase dramatically due to the smallness of the measured value.

6

A.A. Ashryatov, S.V. Prytkov, A.O. Syromyasov

In the selected area, the maximum error when using piecewise linear interpolation is about 6.5%.

Figure 5: The estimated PB of a system of two differently oriented radiators: a) in a vertical plane C90-270; b) in the horizontal plane

5. CONCLUSION Thus, this paper presents a method for calculating the total light distribution of several ICs located at the same point; however, with a different orientation in space. The algorithm is based on combining own coordinate systems of various ICs with the help of turns described in a matrix form, transition to a common spherical coordinate system as well as the addition of the forces of light corresponding to the same values of the angular coordinates.

The method contains no restrictions in terms of photometric IP bodies. It can be the basis of numerical algorithms for calculating the total light distribution in cases where the PB of the original ICs are described not analytically, but approximately - based on measurement results.

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data can be made available by contacting the corresponding authors

7. CONFLICT OF INTEREST The authors confirm that the presented data does not contain any conflict of interest.

8. ACKNOWLEDGMENT This work was financially supported by the Russian Foundation for Basic Research. Grant 18-48-130009 \ 18.

9. REFERENCES [1] Ashryatov, A. A., Prytkov, S. V., & Syromyasov, A. O. (2014). Method of Calculating the Spatial Light Distribution of a System of Multi-oriented LED Emitters. Computer Research and Modeling, 6(4), 577–584. *Corresponding author (A.A. Ashryatov). E-mail: ashryatov@rambler.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of

Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11H http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11H.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.143

7

[2] Ashurkov, S. G., & Bartsev, A. A. (2007). Method of Calculating the Photometric Body of Emitters with LEDs of Different Spatial Orientation. Svetotekhnika, 1, 43–44.

[3] GOST R 54350-2015, Lighting Requirements and Test Methods, Lighting Fittings: National Standard of the Russian Federation: Lighting Devices, red, Federal Agency for Technical Regulation and Metrology, - Moscow: Standardinform, 2015, - p. 41 [4] Kovalenko O. Yu. Zakharzhevsky, O. A., & Afonin, V. V. (2008). Simulation of the LED Module According to a Given Light Intensity Curve. Design Systems, Modeling, Preproduction and Project Management CAD / CAM / CAE / PDM: Sat. Articles II Intern, Scientific and Practical conf. Penza: Volga Knowledge House ANOO, pp. 30–33.

[5] Skvortsov, A. V., (2002). Delaunay Triangulation and Its Application. Tomsk: Publishing House Tom. University, p.128 [6] Syromyasov, A. O., & Prytkov, S. V. (2014). Approximation of Photometric Data by Trigonometric Polynomials of One Variable. Almanac of Modern Science and Education, 5-6(84), 117–122.

[7] Syromyasov, A. O., & Prytkov, S. V. (2014). On Interpolation Methods based on Photometric Data on a Plane. Materials of the XI International Scientific and Practical Conference “Integration of science and practice as a Mechanism for the Effective Development of Modern Society” . - Moscow, pp. 13– 17.

[8] Syromyasov, A. O. (2014). Calculation of the Light Distribution of Point Sources Using the Discrete Fourier Transform. Almanac of Modern Science and Education, 9(87), 127–131.

[9] IESNA Computer Committee. (1995). IESNA standard file format for electronic transfer of photometric data. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

[10] Advanced Road Lighting Technology with Low-level http://www.thornlighting.com/PDB/resources/teaser/EN/TLG_Orus.pdf

Mounting,

URL:

[11] Albert Ashryatov, Dinara Churakova Luminaires, International Journal of Engineering and Technology, -2018, Vol 7, Issue 2.13, pp.

252-254.

URL: https://www.sciencepubco.com/index.php/ijet/article/view/12673/5037 [12] Center for Collective Use of Scientific Equipment http://www.mrsu.ru/ru/sci/labs.php?ELEMENT_ID=57865

“Lighting

Metrology”,

URL:

Dr.Albert A. Ashryatov is an Associate Professor of The Light Sources Department of Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education “National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University”. His research is related to improving the Efficiency of Optical Radiation and Devices based on them.

Dr.Sergey V. Prytkov is an Associate Professor of Lightning Department of Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education “National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University.” He has a Ph.D. in Technical Sciences. He is interested in Lighting Design.

Dr.Alexey O. Syromyasov is an Associate Professor at the Department of Applied Mathematics, Differential Equations and Theoretical Mechanics of Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education “National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University.” He is a Candidate of Physical and Mathematical Sciences. He is interested in Mathematical and Computer Models of Physic and Technical Processes.

8

A.A. Ashryatov, S.V. Prytkov, A.O. Syromyasov

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11I

CHARACTERISTICS OF WATERPROOF LAMPS A. A. Gorbunov a

a*

Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education, National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University, 430005, Republic of Mordovia, Saransk, ul. Bolshevistskaya, 68ok, RUSSIA.

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 06 May 2019 Received in revised form 12 July 2019 Accepted 24 July 2019 Available online 01 August 2019

This paper is devoted to the study of characteristics of experimental samples of waterproof lamps. The test is set up for LED luminaire (IP65) and filament lamp (IP54). The luminous flux and luminous efficiency are also observed. The LED lamp uses IPX5 test method, while filament lamp uses IPX4. The experiment traces the change in the parameters of the luminaires, taking measurements after every 1000 hours of their burning, with total 3000 hours. The test results on the moisture resistance of the investigated luminaires shows that the LED luminaire passes the test for the degree of protection.

For the filament lamp, the result is negative (i.e., the moisture penetrates inside the lamp body).

Keywords: Water-resistant lamp; Luminous Flux; Luminous Efficiency; Moisture-proof lamp; Color Temperature; Color Rendering Index; Light Source.

© 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION For lighting areas with high humidity, a special waterproof lighting is required, since combination of water and electricity is unsafe. Waterproof lighting fixtures vary in terms of design, luminous flux, color and other criteria [1].

Advantages of waterproof lamps include - Reliability and durability due to impact-resistant sealed enclosure; - Fire safety; most models operate at low voltage; - Ease of installation of models on solar batteries or batteries, since they operate from their own power source; - In models with LEDs, brightness adjustment is provided.

Their disadvantages - For low-voltage devices, it is necessary to additionally purchase transformers converting the main voltage to 12 V; - Labor-intensive installation; since some models of luminaires function from the main *Corresponding author (A. A. Gorbunov). E-mail: alexdsmail@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11I http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11I.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.144

1

sources, then the sources are underground, a cable must be laid from the network to the installation site of the lighting device.

2. OBJECT OF RESEARCH Two experimental sample fixtures were taken to study the characteristics: - Lamp NBL-01-60-E27 / WH with a Uniel Sky 8W filament lamp; - NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED. Waterproof NBL series lamps are reliable and compact, already classic, round and oval, for outdoor and indoor use: everywhere where high protection against dust and moisture is required (Figure 1). The luminaires are designed to be used with incandescent lamps with a standard E27 base and are available in two sizes - for 60 W and 100 W lamps.

Figure 1. Light NBL-01-60-E27 / WH [2] The degree of protection of this luminaire is IP54 (5- some dust can penetrate inside, but it does not disrupt the operation of the device. Full protection against contact; 4- protection against splashes falling in any direction).

Technical characteristics of the lamp are presented in Table 1.

Table 1. Technical characteristics of the lamp NBL-01-60-E27/WH [2] Type of lamp Lamp type Lamp base Lamp power Number of lamps (light sources) Nominal voltage Type of control device (gear/transformer) Body material Color of a plafond/diffuser Degree of protection (IP) Suitable for emergency lighting Light output Suitable for wall mounting Pulse ignition device (IZU) Width Protection class Fire class "F" Lamp color

2

A. A. Gorbunov

Luminaire with diffuser/diffuser Incandescent lamp (general purpose) E27 60W 1 230V Not required Aluminum White IP54 Yes Straight Yes Not required 195mm I Yes No color

This lamp was taken from filament lamp manufacturer Uniel Sky with E27 base for the study. The appearance of the lamp is shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2. The appearance of the lamp Uniel Sky 8W The Uniel Sky 4000K 8W LED bulb in the shape of a pear is an analogue of the Ilyich Lamp, not only in its characteristics but also in appearance. Thanks to sapphire LED strings, the light from the lamp extends to 360 degrees. Specifications of the lamp are presented in Table 2.

Table 2. Uniel Sky Lamp Specifications Options Power Consumption (W) Power supply (V) Luminous flux FL (LM) Service life (hr) Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Base Light angle Color rendering index

Values 8 220 800 30000 60 102 E27 360° Ra>80

NBL-P-LED luminaires are an energy-efficient analogue of standard airbag luminaires in shape, size and lighting characteristics.

The appearance of the lamp NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3. Lamp NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED [3].

Degree of protection of this luminaire is IP65 (6- Dust cannot get into the device; full protection against contact. 5- Protection against water jets from any direction). *Corresponding author (A. A. Gorbunov). E-mail: alexdsmail@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11I http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11I.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.144

3

Technical characteristics of the lamp are presented in Table 3.

Table 3. Technical characteristics of the lamp NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED [3] Type of lamp Lamp type Lamp power (P) Nominal voltage Ceiling/diffuser material Body material Body-color Color of a plafond/diffuser Degree of protection (IP) Light distribution Suitable for emergency lighting Light output Suitable for wall mounting Surface type Length Width Height/depth Protection class Temperature limit Light color category Average nominal lifetime Color temperature

Luminaire with diffuser/diffuser Light-emitting diode (LED) 7W 220 ... 240 (V) Opal plastic Plastic White White IP65 Symmetrical Yes Straight Yes Matte 208 mm 120 mm 74 mm II -40 ... 40 (° C) Neutral cold white (3300-5300 K) 30,000 (h) 4000 (k)

3. STUDY OF ELECTRICAL AND LIGHT CHARACTERISTICS The GO-2000 goniophotometer from Everfine was used to measure the electrical and light characteristics of the studied samples.

Before starting work, the lamps should be stabilized.

NBL-01-60-E27/WH luminaires with Uniel Sky 8W NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED are shown in Figures 4 and 5.

Stabilization charts for filament lamp and

Figure 4: Stabilization schedule of the Figure 5: Stabilization schedule of the lamp lamp NBL-01-60-E27 / WH with Uniel Sky NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED. 8W filament lamp.

Next, we measure electrical parameters of luminaires to verify the declared parameters. The measurement results are presented in Table 4.

4

A. A. Gorbunov

Table 4: Measurement results Lamp Harkey Voltage U, (В) I, A P, W FL, LM luminous efficacy (, LM/W)

NBL-01-60-E27 /WH 220.0 0.046 5.0 452.5 87.12

NBL-P01-7-4KWH-IP65-LED 220.0 0.058 6.76 610.0 90.18

Table 5: Measurement results Lamp

NBL-01-60-E27 NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP /WH 65-LED 1000 hours Voltage U, (В) 220.0 220.0 I, A 0.045 0.057 P,W 5.0 6.76 FL, LM 437.3 568.8 87.46 84.14 , LM/W Tc, К 4169 4367 Ra 80.41 84.64 2000 hours U, В 220.0 220.0 I, A 0.045 0.056 P,W 5.0 6.76 FL, LM 427.9 540.8 85.58 80.0 , LM/W Tc, К 4148 4454 Ra 80.39 84.96 3000 hours U, В 220.0 220.0 I, A 0.044 0.056 P,W 5.0 6.76 FL, LM 406.9 519.8 81.38 76.89 , LM/W Tc, К 4210 4425 Ra 80.84 84.35 К: Thermodynamic temperature (Kelvin).

Harkey

To study the luminous magnitudes of the luminaires, a light measuring ball (2 m) - OL IS 7600 (Figure 6.2) and a spectroradiometer OL 770 VIS / NIR were used. The experiment was to trace the change in the parameters of the luminaires, taking measurements after every 1000 hours of their burning. Table 5 represents the measurements after every 1000 hours of burning lamps.

Figures 6-7 show graphs for the dependence of the luminous flux and luminous efficiency on the burning time.

*Corresponding author (A. A. Gorbunov). E-mail: alexdsmail@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11I http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11I.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.144

5

luminous flux, 700 Фл, лм 600 500 NBL-01-60-E27/WH

400 300

NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65LED

200 100 0 0

1000

2000

3000

t, ч. (time, hours)

Figure 6. Graph of the luminous flux of lamps from burning time (hours) luminous efficacy  95 (LM/W), лм/вт 90 85

NBL-01-60-E27/WH

80

NBL-P01-7-4K-WHIP65-LED

75 70 0

1000

2000

3000

t, ч. (time, hours)

Figure 7: Graph of light output luminaires from burning time.

After 3000 hours, the luminous flux and luminous efficiency in both lamps gradually decreased.

For the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED, the luminous efficacy decreased more intensely than the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH. Figures 8 and 9 respectively represent the graphs for color temperature and color rendering index versus burning time.

Tц, К 4600 4500 4400 4300 4200 4100 4000 3900 3800 3700

NBL-01-60-E27/WH

NBL-P01-7-4K-WHIP65-LED

0

1000

2000

3000

t, ч.

Figure 8: Graph of color temperature fixtures from burning time.

6

A. A. Gorbunov

color rendering 86 index (Ra) 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 0

NBL-01-60-E27/WH NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65LED

1000

2000

3000

t, ч.

Figure 9: Graph of the color rendering index of lamps from burning time.

4. MOISTURE RESISTANCE TEST To check the lamp for moisture resistance, it is installed, as for normal operation, but in the most unfavorable position, in a moisture chamber, where the relative humidity is maintained from 91% to 95%. The air temperature at any point of the chamber where the sample is located must be maintained with an accuracy of about 1 ° C for any suitable temperature t from 20 °C to 30 °C. The test results of the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH luminaire for the degree of protection provided by the IP X4 enclosure according to GOST IEC 60598-1-2013 are presented in Table 6.

Table 6: Results of the lamp NBL-01-60-E27 / WH. Test requirements The luminaire shell must provide protection against the ingress of dust, solid particles and moisture according to the luminaire classification based on the degree of protection indicated on it. All lamps must be moisture resistant during operation.

Test method

Test result

IPX4 - the test is conducted through spraying with a rocking pipe at a vertical angle of ± 180 for 10 minutes under load and 10 minutes without any load in the rain chamber.

After the tests, accumulations of water on electrical insulating parts, water ingress on parts under voltage, and accumulations of water near cable entries were detected.

Requirements were not met.

Table 7 presents the test results of the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED luminaire for the degree of protection provided by the IP X5 enclosure according to GOST IEC 60598-1-2013.

Table 7: Test results of the lamp NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED. Test requirements The luminaire shell must provide protection against the ingress of dust, solid particles and moisture according to the luminaire classification, based on the degree of protection indicated on it. All lamps during operation must be moisture resistant.

Test method IPX5 - the test is carried out by douche of the lamp from all sides with a stream of water formed by a nozzle. The water flow should be 12.5 l / min ± 5%, the inner diameter of the nozzle is 6.3 mm, the distance between the nozzle and the surface of the shell is 2.5-3 m., and ultimately, the test duration is 15 minutes.

Test result After testing, the work of the lamp is not interrupted, the accumulation of water insulating parts, the ingress of water on the parts under voltage, the accumulation of water near the cable glands are not observed.

All requirements are met.

5. FINDING After 3000 hours, the luminous flux and luminous efficiency in both lamps gradually decreased. *Corresponding author (A. A. Gorbunov). E-mail: alexdsmail@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11I http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11I.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.144

7

In the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED luminaire, the luminous efficacy decreased more intensively (by 15%) than the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH (by 11%). The color temperature of the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH increased by 6%; while, that of the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED slightly decreased (1%).

Moreover, the color rendering index in NBL-01-60-E27 / WH in the first 1000 hours decreased sharply with time by 4%, while in NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED, it did not change significantly (increases ≈0, 5%).

6. CONCLUSIONS The results of the study revealed that the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED LED luminaire features are more stable than the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH luminaire with a Uniel Sky 8W filament lamp.

The test results on the moisture resistance of the investigated luminaires showed that the NBL-P01-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED LED luminaire passed the test for the degree of protection, and the test for the degree of protection of the NBL-01-60-E27 / WH luminaire with Uniel filament lamp Sky 8W was negative (moisture penetrated inside the lamp body).

7. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Used or generated data already present in this study.

8. CONFLICT OF INTEREST The authors confirm that the presented data do not contain a conflict of interest.

9. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors express their gratitude to Dr.Olga Evgenievna Zheleznikova, Director of the Institute of Electronics and Lighting Engineering, for providing conditions for conducting the experiment.

10. REFERENCES [1] Khokhlov, S.S., & Gorbunov, A.A. (2019). Investigation of moisture-proof characteristics lamps.

In the collection: Materials of the XXII scientific-practical conference of young people scientists, postgraduates and students of the National research Mordovia State University named after N. P. Ogareva: conference Proceedings. In 3 parts. Compiled by AV Stolyarov. Responsible for the release of PV Senin. Saransk, 225-228.

[2] Overhead Light Series NBL-O-E27. http://www.navigator-light.ru/svetilniki/osveshhenie-zhkx/nakladnyie-tipa-npp/nbl-o-e27/94800.htm l [3] Lamp 94 822 NBL-PO1-7-4K-WH-IP65-LED https://lampoid.ru/svetilniki/zhkh_svetodiodnie/ svetilnik_94_822_nbl-po1-7-4k-wh-ip65-led_navigator.html Dr.Gorbunov A.A. (ORCID: 0000-0002-0290-3217) is an Associate professor at Department of lightning technology, Deputy Director for research of the Institute of electronics and lighting of Federal State Budgetary Educational Institution of Higher Education "National Research Ogarev Mordovia State University. He graduated with honors from the Faculty of Lighting at the Moscow State University named after N.P. Ogaryova. He has a PhD in Technical Sciences.

He is a specialist in the research and development of Power Efficient Light Sources and Lighting Devices based on them.

Trademarks Disclaimer: All products names including trademarks™ or registered® trademarks mentioned in this article are the property of their respective owners, using for identification purposes only. Use of them does not imply any endorsement or affiliation.

8

A. A. Gorbunov

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11J

AN APPLICATION OF PETRI NETS IN TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS SYNTHESIS ISSUES ON AGRICULTURE a*

a

b

D.A. Petrosov , V.A. Ignatenko , S.D. Litsukov , c d e V.G. Feklin , A.N. Zelenina , A.V. Kochegarov a

Department of Informatics and Information Technologies, Belgorod State Agrarian University named after V.Ya. Gorin, RUSSIA b Department of Agricultural Sciences Faculty Agronomy at Belgorod State Agrarian University named after V.Ya. Gorin, RUSSIA c Department of Decision Making and Financial Technology in Physics and Mathematics, Financial University under the Russian Federation Government, RUSSIA d Department Leading Expert of the design in Engineering Science, Voronezh Institute of High Technologies the autonomous non-profit educational organization of higher education, RUSSIA e Department of the Fire and Emergency Equipment, Voronezh Institute - branch of the Ivanovo Fire and Rescue Academy of the State Fire Service of MES RUSSIA ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 24 May 2019 Received in revised form 19 July 2019 Accepted 26 July 2019 Available online 01 August 2019

Modern agriculture aims at product quantity and quality increase, with cost reduction, achievable through technology development, machinery, and creation of modern intelligent decision support systems aimed at technological process synthesis based on the economic, human, technical and technological resources. The development of new models and methods capable of solving the problems of structural and Keywords: parametric synthesis will increase the speed without resorting to GA Operator; significant economic costs associated with computing device productive Simulation modeling; This paper uses three modern trends: simulation The theory of Petri Nets; capacity increase. modeling, evolutionary methods and Petri net theory (allowing Genetic algorithm; combining all trends by one mathematical apparatus that supports both Modern agriculture. software and hardware implementations). The genetic algorithm is adapted using embedded Petri nets and expert knowledge. To synthesize technological process for winter wheat cultivation, it proposes to use the common IDEF3 methodology, making it possible to identify the branch points. This study creates a unified model that greatly simplifies the process of software and hardware implementation of an intelligent decision support system. The simulation of technological process models is obtained as a result of intellectual synthesis using PIPE4 open software. After the computational experiment, the obtained models for winter wheat growing correspond to a given criterion of economic benefits for conventional agricultural enterprises. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH. *Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

1

1. INTRODUCTION One of the areas of modern science is the development of intelligent methods for decision support systems [1,2]. A lot of research is being conducted in this area by domestic and foreign scientists.

One of the objectives of this trend is the development of intelligent structural synthesis methods of large or complex discrete systems, which include technological processes in various subject areas.

The total research in this subject area allows to identify two leading directions.

In the first direction, the task of structural synthesis is solved at the subject level, without going beyond a specific type, in rare cases beyond the class of technical objects. The bulk of the work in this paradigm is performed by circuit design experts in the field of digital, computer engineering and information systems.

The second trend is the development of universal methods of structural synthesis, applicable for various technical objects and independent of industry specifics.

The main trends of structural synthesis problem solution are the following ones: - Formal synthesis; - Specialized synthesis methods; - Computer synthesis; - Heuristic synthesis; - Combinatorial and logical methods of synthesis; - Intelligent synthesis methods.

The most common mathematical apparatus for synthesis procedure description is graph theory (graphic-analytical method). For example, it is accepted to solve the synthesis problem using the following methods within combinatorial and logical methods: - Morphological synthesis; - "Forward" synthesis; - The synthesis by A-trees; - The synthesis by multi-partition graphs; - The synthesis by oriented hypergraphs; - Logical synthesis systems.

Proceeding from the mentioned above, we can conclude that the creation of a new structural synthesis approach based on the combination of intellectual method and graph theory is promising.

METHODOLOGY As the main tool for the solution, it is proposed to use genetic algorithms adapted to the problem of technological process structural synthesis in agriculture using the theory of Petri nets.

2

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

2.1 GENETIC ALGORITHM (GA) The genetic algorithm selected as an instrumental, structural synthesis, implementing the process, reflects the principles of natural selection, that is, the survival of the most promising individuals, inheritance and mutations. This tool needs to be pre-configured, that is, to determine the setting of operator functioning and the objective function development, which makes it possible to influence the speed of model synthesis that meets the search criteria [3-6].

The main differences of genetic algorithms from traditional methods are the following ones: 1. Within the genetic algorithm, solutions are presented in the form of a code string, while the conversion of these codes is made without any connection with their semantics [4-10].

2. The genetic algorithm uses the property of parallelism, that is, several points of the spatial solution are used during the stage of the search, which makes it possible to avoid undesirable falling into a local extremum of the objective function that is not unimodal.

3. With proper coding, the genetic algorithm will use only valid values of the structures and parameters, which will give the opportunity to increase the speed of structural-parametric synthesis process significantly.

4. During the synthesis of new points in the solution space, the genetic algorithm uses probabilistic rules, and during the transition from one point to another, they use deterministic rules.

The combination of these two rules is more efficient than their separate use.

2.2 PETRI NET THEORY The developed models of the genetic algorithm, the elements of the technological process and the technological process itself can be represented as Petri nets.

When they implement a genetic algorithm with Petri nets, one should take into account the fact that more than one network level is required. The upper level should describe the work of the genetic algorithm itself, and the lower level should contain the models of synthesized technological processes. Therefore, from the variety of extensions of Petri nets one should choose the one that will support: - The subject area independence; - Concurrency; - Probability and determinism; - Structural nature; - Multi-level nature.

This extension is nested Petri nets. In this expansion, the marks of each level can be represented

by Petri net, which allows to describe the elements of technological processes and the technological processes themselves by different nesting models, which will simplify both the process of structural synthesis and the element base description.

*Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

3

PROBLEM SOLUTION 3.1 STRUCTURAL SYNTHESIS PROBLEM STATEMENT OF THE TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS It is required to develop the model of genetic algorithm that will perform the synthesis of a process model capable of processing a given input vector into a desired output at the condition of compliance with an economic indicator, based on the set of models available in the element base, according to a predetermined structure in the form of IDEF3 diagram.

3.2 STRUCTURAL SYNTHESIS FOR TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS The task of technological process structural synthesis in agriculture can be represented as follows.

Given:

S  K, E

(1),

where S is the technological process whose intellectual synthesis should be carried out; K - the process structure, and E - its composition.

The process S may consist of many elements

Е  E1 ,..., E R 

(2),

where Еi is the i-th component of the technological process, and R is the total number of elements that are included in the process.

Each component of the process corresponds to a specific instance, that is, you can put a certain number of analogues that perform the same function in place of each component within the synthesized process. Mathematically, this can be written as

Еi   Еij  Mji1

(3),

where Еij is the j-instance for the i-th component, the total number of copies is M. Assume that the synthesized process must have some set of properties, U   U k  kL1

(4).

Then, during the synthesis of the technological process S, it is necessary to choose such a configuration of the components result during the operation of S.

Е ij k0 

, so that the combination of their properties gives the desired

Since the mathematical toolkit of the Petri net was chosen as the mathematical tool to describe the process S itself and the means of intelligent synthesis, therefore, it is required to present this system in the appropriate form. Е Each component ij k0  , with a given property will be presented by a simulation model based on PNij Petri net. The structure can be the relationship between the outputs of the previous component

4

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

OUTi (the i-th output position) and the inputs of the next INi (the i-th input position) connected by an arc through the transition T, i.e.

R

F : T  IN i  OUTi  i 1

(4).

Such correspondence completely determines the structure of the synthesized technological process using Petri nets. [3. - p. 207] Thus, the synthesized technological process can be represented as PN = PN1,…, PNi,…, PNR, T, F

(5).

Since the main indicator in this work is the economic cost of work in the synthesized technological process, we will compare the tag weight (initial value is 0) to determine the cost of the technological process, which is incremented in accordance with the cost of a particular operation during the simulation modeling resulting from PNi synthesis. In the future, let's compare this value with the given one, the difference between the endogenous variable and the reference value will be the value of the fitness function.

The smaller the modulus of the function value, the closer the model of the technological process obtained as the result of intelligent synthesis to the desired one.

In this study, the structure of the synthesized technological system remains fixed, but it should be created.

Figure 1: The example of fertilizer application technological process during winter wheat cultivation. *Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

5

For this, we will use IDEF3 methodology, allowing us to describe the technological process.

Figure 1 shows the example of fertilizer application technological process for winter wheat growing (a simplified model of the process was developed with the involvement of leading experts in the field of agronomy and agrochemistry from Belgorod State Agrarian University named after V.Ya. Gorin).

According to agronomists, the technological process of winter wheat cultivation is well-established, taking into account regional peculiarities, but there are branches in it that can significantly affect the crop quality and quantity. These points must be subject to synthesis. In this paper, the possibility of technological process synthesizing is considered in accordance with economic requirements, therefore, for each process, the cost of its implementation will be assigned and synthesis will be carried out on all components.

On this branching diagram of the technological process, the connections between the elements are indicated by intersections. The changes in these parts of the process can affect endogenous system variables. The relationship of the remaining elements of the system remains unchanged.

The modeling of components and their interrelation in the proposed model of intellectual structural synthesis is carried out using the theory of Petri nets. Therefore, it is required to create an element base of models on the chosen mathematical apparatus.

It is necessary to create the models of intersections based on Petri nets for the full functioning of the structure, which will not be subject to change:

Figure 2: Patterns of "OR" intersection based on Petri nets - Synchronous "OR", "AND";

6

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

- Asynchronous "OR", "AND", "Exclusive OR".

Besides, it should be noted that these intersections can be both branching (J4) and unifying (J5).

Figure 2: shows the models developed for "OR" intersection.

Since the logical intersection of this type in IDEF3 methodology can function in synchronous and asynchronous mode, and can also perform the functions of combination and branching processes, it is required to develop four models. The work of the synchronous “OR” intersection for joining implies that one or several processes (included in the intersection) must be completed simultaneously, the asynchronous “OR” does not set the task of process simultaneous termination. During branching (the exit of the connecting arcs from the intersection) with the synchronous "OR", one or several processes are started simultaneously, and in the case of the asynchronous presentation, one or several processes are started, but not necessarily simultaneously.

Figure 3 shows the developed models of “AND” intersection based on Petri nets.

Figure 3: “AND” intersection models based on Petri nets The logical "AND" intersection is also represented by four models. The difference between the logical "AND" and "OR" is that all processes must be executed or started. In the synchronous presentation, the processes begin or end at the same time, and in the case of asynchronous *Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

7

presentation, the simultaneous start of the processes is not necessary.

Figure 4 shows "Exclusive OR" intersection model. Exclusive "OR" works only in asynchronous mode, since it is possible to start or end only one process. Therefore, two models have been developed for this type of logical intersection, based on the mathematical apparatus of Petri nets.

Figure 4: "Exclusive OR" intersection models based on Petri nets In addition to logical intersections, process modeling is required. Depending on the problem being solved, the process models may differ. Since this work requires to synthesize a technological system that will meet the costs of an agricultural enterprise for winter wheat cultivation, the process model can be represented as follows (see Fig. 5). The intersection T0 changes the previous weight of the H mark (at the beginning of the computational experiment, the value is 0), incrementing it by operation cost.

Figure 5: Simplified process model that solves the problem of operation cost calculation After the element base creation, they should develop a model that will reflect the work of the genetic algorithm. To describe the work of the genetic algorithm, it is proposed to use such an extension of Petri nets as nested nets. In this view, the first level mark is a network. They proposed to use this property. Each first level macro mark of the developed model will be a Petri net, which models the work of the synthesized technological system and is the population genotype.

8

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

Figure 6 shows the genetic algorithm model based on nested Petri nets.

Figure 6: The model of genetic algorithm based on nested Petri nets

3.3 GENETIC ALGORITHM OPERATORS The role of genetic algorithm operators is performed by network top level transitions: SEL transition (selection operator), CROSSi transitions (crossing operator), MUTi transitions (mutation operator) and RED transition (reduction operator).

The work of the genetic algorithm operators is the following one: 1. SEL (Select) operator prepares the initial population (calculates the fitness function, the value less or equal to a given amount of money equivalent that an agrarian enterprise is willing to spend on the execution of the technological process), evaluates randomly generated individuals and prepares the pairs for crossing (for example, the best with the best) [7-10].

2. CROSS operator performs the exchange with the part of the main technological system elements, thereby generating the so-called descendants.

3. MUT operator performs the replacement of the technological system element to any possible.

4. RED (Reduction) operator evaluates the resulting generation by calculating the fitness function, the individuals with the worst value of the function are destroyed by the operator, only individuals with the best fitness function remain in the population.

*Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

9

The work of the proposed model continues with the remaining individuals until the stopping requirements are met: 1. The solution is found; 2. The time for solution is over; 3. A certain number of populations were processed.

Thus, they developed the simulation model of a genetic algorithm that is capable to perform the synthesis of technological process model to process a given input vector to the desired output taking into account the condition of compliance with an economic indicator, based on the set of models available in the element base, according to a predetermined structure in the form of IDEF3 diagram.

3.4 RESULT Table 1 presents the cost options of each process, taking into account the work of machinery, wages and the cost of materials that arise during winter wheat growing (the work cost performed by the agronomist of the farm is assumed to be 0 rubles).

Table 1: cost options for each operation. №

Operation name

Designation

1.

Agrochemical soil analysis

2

Soil liming

3

Apply organic fertilizer

4

Fertilize during sowing

5

Fertilize during primary processing Plant feeding

ААХП250 ААХП0 ААХП350 ВИП1500 ВИП2000 ВИП2500 ВОУ2000 ВОУ 0 ВОУ 1500 ВУП1000 ВУП1500 ВУП0 ВУОО1500 ВУОО 1600 ВУОО0 ВПР1200 ВПР 1300 ВПР 0 ОВ1000 ОВ1050 ОВ0 СУ1000 СУ1400 СУ2000

6

7

Process from pests

8

Harvesting

Cost for a 50 ha field, Thousand Rubles.

250 0 350 1500 2000 2500 2000 0 1500 1000 1500 0 1500 1600 0 1200 1300 0 1000 1050 0 1000 1400 2000

Thus, based on the presented components and instances, the initial population will be formed according to the following structure: < 𝑂𝑅, ААХП𝑖, ВИП𝑖, Х, ВОУ𝑖, 𝑋, ВУП𝑖, Х, ВУО𝑖 , ВПР𝑖, ОВ𝑖, СУ𝑖 > where X and OR is the type of intersection (not affected by the genetic algorithm operators, therefore, they may not participate in the procedure of intelligent synthesis).

10

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

The example of population individual: ААХП250,ВИП1500,ВОУ2000,ВУП1000,ВУО1500,ВПР1200,ОВ1000,СУ1000 The macro mark in the form of Petri net corresponding to the represented individual is shown on Figure 7.

Figure 7: Population individual example based on Petri nets The search for a solution was implemented at the request of the cultivation budget which made 7300 thousand rubles.

A number of satisfying solutions were obtained in 7 seconds after the simulation: ААХП0,ВИП1500,ВОУ0,ВУП1000,ВУО1500,ВПР1200,ОВ1000,СУ1000 = 7200 thous. rub. ААХП0,ВИП1500,ВОУ0,ВУП1000,ВУО1500,ВПР1200,ОВ1000,СУ1400 = 7400 thous. rub. ААХП0,ВИП1500,ВОУ0,ВУП1000,ВУО1500,ВПР1200,ОВ0,СУ1000= 6200 thous. rub. ААХП250,ВИП1500,ВОУ0,ВУП1000,ВУО1500,ВПР1200,ОВ0,СУ1000= 6450 thous. rub.r

RESULT AND DISCUSSION This paper proposes the approach to create a new method for technological process synthesizing, which is based on three modern theories: simulation modeling, the theory of Petri nets, and evolutionary methods. The resulting models are a universal tool for the synthesis of discrete systems, which have the property of parallelism and can be used both in software and in hardware implementation. The article presents the example of the proposed operation models and methods during the technological process selection on the basis of fertilizer application cost when winter wheat is cultivated. However, it is possible to evaluate such indicators as environmental friendliness, manufacturability, etc. For this, it is required to develop the library of element models in the required subject area. Previously, this method was applied to the problems of workflow system synthesis [3], the synthesis of computing technology based on trigger elements [4].

*Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

11

5. CONCLUSION The proposed models make it possible to manage the process of finding solutions by transition functioning reconfiguration that simulate the work of genetic algorithm operators in the process of work [5, 6], which can significantly reduce the search time for solutions. Parallelism, inherent in the essence of the proposed method due to the applied mathematical tools, can be used in conjunction with the GPGPU (General-purpose computing on graphics processing units) technology, which will increase the speed of the intelligent decision support system during software implementation.

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Used or generated data already present in this study.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This work is supported by RFBR grant No. 16-29-12911.

8. REFERENCES [1] Bulgakov, S. S. (2016). The prospects for the implementation of neural networks in decision support systems. Young Scientist, 4(108),. 344-345.

[2] Streltsova, E.D., Bogomyagkova, I.V., & Streltsov, V.S. (2013). Model of the recognizing device in the decision support system managing interbudget regulation. Scientific statements. History series.

Political science. Economy. Computer science, 1(144), 157-163.

[3] Lomazov, V.A., Mikhailova, V.L., Petrosov, D.A., & Elchaninov, D.B. (2013). The evolutionary procedure of structural and parametric synthesis of imitation models for workflow systems. Scientific Gazette of Belgorod State University. Series: History. Political science. Economy. Computer science, 28(1), 204.

[4] Petrosov, D. A. (2009). Mathematical model of computing technology configuration development based on triggers. IzhSTU Bulletin named after M.T. Kalashnikov, 3, 139-143.

[5] Petrosov, D. A. (2017). Adaptive structural-parametric synthesis of large discrete systems with a given behavior using artificial neural networks of the RAAM class. From the collection: Science-intensive technologies and intellectual systems in the XXIst century. The collection of articles of the International Scientific and Practical Conference: in 2 parts, pp. 69-74.

[6] Petrosov, D. A., Lomazov, V. A., Dobrunova, A. I., Matorin, S. I., & Lomazova, V. I. (2015).

Evolutionary synthesis of large discrete systems with dynamic structure. Biosciences Biotechnology Research Asia, 12(3), 2971-2981.

[7] Petrosov, D. A., Lomazov, V. A., Dobrunova, A. I., & Lomazova, V. I. (2015). Large discrete systems evolutionary synthesis procedure. Biosciences Biotechnology Research Asia, 12(2), 1767-1775.

[8] Lomazov, V. A., Petrosov, D. A., Dobrunova, A. I., Lomazova, V. I., & Matorin, S. I. (2016).

Evolutionary selection of the models of interacting processes on the basis of expert assessments.

International Journal of Applied Engineering Research, 11(3), 1867-1873.

[9] Petrosov, D.A., Basavin, D.A., Ignatenko, V.A., & Lomazov, V.A. (2017). Adaptive structural-parametric synthesis of large discrete system with the specified behavior. International Journal of Pure and Applied Mathematics, 117(22), 173-176.

12

D.A. Petrosov, V.A. Ignatenko, S.D. Litsukov, V.G. Feklin, A.N. Zelenina, A.V. Kochegarov

[10] Petrosov, D.A., Lomazov, V.A., Mironov, A.L., Klyuev, S.V., Muravyov, K.A., & Vasilievna, F.M. (2018). Intellectual structural-parametric synthesis of large discrete systems with specified behavior. Journal of Engineering and Applied Sciences, 13(8), 2177-2182.

Dr.D.A. Petrosov is an Associate Professor of the Engineering Science, Department of Informatics and Information Technologies, Belgorod State Agrarian University named after V.Ya. Gorin, Russia. His research interested in System Theory and System Analysis, Intelligent information system, Petri net theory, Evolutionary procedure.

Vladimir Ignatenko is a Candidate of Engineering Sciences in the field of Automation of Technological processes, Belgorod State Agricultural University named after V. Gorin, Belgorod, Russia. His researcher interested in the Analysis of Production Processes using Network Technologies and in particular Petri Nets.

Dr.Sergey D. Litsukov is a Professor at Belgorod State Agrarian University named after V.Ya. Gorin. His research interested in Agronomy, Agrochemical Soil Analysis, Engineering Process of Agrarian Crops Growth

Dr.Vadim Feklin is the First Deputy Head of Data Analysis, Decision Making, and Financial Technology Department, Financial University under the Russian Federation Government, Russia. His researcher is related to Mathematical Modeling and Educational Management Technology.

Dr.Anna N. Zelenina is a Professor, at Department Expert of the design, Voronezh Institute of High Technologies Her research interests are Systems Analysis, Management and Data Processing, Education, information Systems and Technology, IT and Computer Science, Additive Technology, 3D modeling, and Computer Graphics.

Dr.Alexey V. Kochegarov is an Associate Professor at Department of The Fire and Emergency Equipment, Voronezh Institute - Branch of the Ivanovo Fire and Rescue Academy of the State Fire Service of MES Russia. His research interests are Development and Use of Advanced Automated Systems; Development and Use of Integrative Automated Systems; Modeling of Automated Systems

Trademarks Disclaimer: All products names including trademarks™ or registered® trademarks mentioned in this article are the property of their respective owners, using for identification purposes only. Use of them does not imply any endorsement or affiliation.

*Corresponding author (D.A. Petrosov). E-mail: scorpionss2002@mail.ru ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11J http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A10J.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.145

13

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11K

EFFECTS OF PARTICIPATIVE DECISION MAKING ON LEADERSHIP STYLES: A STUDENT SURVEY AT GOMAL UNIVERSITY, PAKISTAN a*

Muhammad Siddique , Allah Nawaz a

a*

Department of Public Administration, Gomal University, D.I.Khan, PAKISTAN.

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 29 April 2019 Received in revised form 08 July 2019 Accepted 26 July 2019 Available online 31 July 2019

Participative decision making (PDM) is characterized with many human-oriented attributes, however, on top of it, is the sharing of decision making by the leader with the related officers/workers, so that the concerns of all employees are taken into account at the time of decision making. It injects the feeling of ownership among co-workers, which is, obviously, very motivating. PDM seems more connected with the transformational leadership style (TRF) as compared to a transactional mode. Transactional leadership style (TRS) refers to a leader who prefers going by the book and using rewards and punishments and management by exception (active and passive). TRF leaders rather use themselves as a role model and focus on motivation, employee’s creativity, and individual contributions. Thus, it is hypothesized that PDM is positively linked with TRF, while negatively related to TRS. The model was tested in the field survey and statistical tools were used to analyze the data regarding the hypotheses of the model. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

Keywords: Participative leadership; PDM; TRS;TRF; Transactional Leadership; Transformational Leadership; Inspirational motivation; Rewards-punishment.

1. INTRODUCTION Participative decision making has gained much of the attention of different researchers, social scientists, managers, and administrators for more than five decades. It is defined as collective or shared decision making or empowering of superiors and subordinates at different levels of organizational hierarchy to participate in decision making (Mitchell, 1973). Several studies have, so far, been conducted to measure the effects of participative decision making on task performance, employees’ satisfaction, and employees’ turnover. However, most of the studies produced ambiguous or unclear results except some empirical studies (e.g. Miller & Monge, 1986; Cotton, et al., 1988; Siddique and Nawaz, 2019) have reported moderately positive relationships between these variables.

In this study, the researcher intends to know the effects of Participative decision making on leadership styles. For this purpose, a student survey was conducted by taking into account the views of students *Corresponding author (M.Siddique and A.Nawaz). Tel: +92-3339990721 E-mail: mpasiddique@gmail.com, profallahnawaz@gu.edu.pk. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11K http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11K.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

1

at Gomal University, Dera Ismail Khan, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW 2.1 PARTICIPATIVE DECISION MAKING The modern management of contemporary organizations values their employees by empowering them to participate in the decision-making process of the organization. This participation is either direct by receiving their inputs for decisions or indirect participation through employees’ representatives. In both cases, the employees share their voices and influence decision making (Miller and Monge, 1986)).

Miller and Monge’s (1986) argued that subordinates have a better know-how of their work than the superiors. So, the decision taken with the inputs of subordinates is better to implement. Similarly, the PDM enhances the morale of employees and creates a sense of recognition among them, which ultimately increases their job satisfaction and job retention with increased productivity (Cotton et al., 1988).

Cotton et al. (1988) has presented the following categories of PDM:    

Direct Participation: Employees participate in decisions related to their work; Consultative Participation: Employees’ views are taken into consideration while making decisions by the managers; Employees’ Partial Ownership: Employees partially become the owners and influence the organizational decisions; and Representative Participation: Employees indirectly participate, through a union steward or association.

2.2 TRANSFORMATIONAL LEADERSHIP Transformational leadership is a contemporary view of leadership which motivates and inspires workers to perform extra-ordinary in the organization. It is considered as the most impressive style of leadership where the leader becomes the role model for his followers (Robbins et al., 2012). A leader with this style of leadership, inspire his workers and motivates them to perform at their level best to achieve the challenging goals and targets (Maria, 2012; Zumitzavan & Udchachone, 2014). These leaders believe in the assignment of tasks to their followers, a delegation of authority to them to accomplish those tasks, and develop confidence among them by allowing to participate in the decision making (Maria, 2012).

Bass & Riggio (2006) has presented four characteristics of transformational leaders: 1. Idealized Influence: The transformational leader exerts idealized influence by becoming a role model for his followers.

2. Inspirational Motivation: Inject inspirational motivation among their followers by providing meaning and challenge to their followers’ work.

3. Intellectual Stimulation: Inspire their followers to be creative and innovative by re-framing problems, questioning assumptions, and approaching old situations in newer ways.

4. Individualized Consideration: A transformational leader act as coach and mentor by giving individual attention to each follower.

2.3 TRANSACTIONAL LEADERSHIP Transactional style of leadership is commonly considered as the task-oriented style of leadership.

It emphasizes on the productivity of the workers, work supervision, organization of resources, and

2

M.Siddique , A.Nawaz

achievement of organizational objectives. A leader using the transactional style, ensure compliance of workers regarding the timely completion of tasks, work standards, and organizational efficiency and effectiveness through the use of reward-punishment tools (Maria, 2012). These conditional rewards include promotions, incentives, awards, praise, gifts, appreciation, etc., are awarded to the workers when the performance standards are achieved. Similarly, the contingent punishment such as fine, wage-cut, demotion, suspension, dismissal, etc., are given to the workers who fail to achieve the performance standards (Odumeru & Ifeanyi, 2013; Dartey-Baaha & Mekporb, 2017).

Similarly, the transactional leaders like to maintain the status quo and simply keep the things on the same fashion. The emphasis of such type of leaders is on workers’ output and quality of work, and they devise ways and means to improve the task performance. This style of leadership is usually result-bearing in emergency situations where crisis management is the top priority to reduce the possible losses to the organization (Odumeru & Ifeanyi, 2013; Zumitzavan & Udchachone, 2014; Mohiuddin, 2017).

2.4 DEMOGRAPHIC IMPACTS ON BEHAVIORS Demographic characteristics of respondents play a significant role in shaping their behaviors towards participative decision making and leadership styles. There is an array of research studies on the measurement of demographic implications on the leadership styles (see, for example, Nikolaou et al., 2007; Kotur & Anbazhagan, 2014; Patel & Buiting, 2013; Lok & Crawford, 2004). In this study, the researcher has taken two demographics including Gender, and Qualification.

2.5 THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK In Figure 1, theoretical framework the one independent variable ‘Participative Decision Making’ and two dependent variables ‘Transactional’ and ‘Transformational’ leadership styles have been presented. Similarly, the two demographic variables ‘Gender’ and ‘Qualification’ are also given.

Figure 1: Theoretical framework for PDM in this study.

3. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 3.1 PHILOSOPHY AND APPROACH The researcher has applied the survey approach because the survey is considered as most suitable especially when there is a large size of the population and the researcher is not able to access all the elements of the population. Thus, through a survey, the researchers select the most representative part of the population through sampling, collects data from them, tests the relationships emerging from the literature, and generalize the results for the entire population from which the sample was selected. *Corresponding author (M.Siddique and A.Nawaz). Tel: +92-3339990721 E-mail: mpasiddique@gmail.com, profallahnawaz@gu.edu.pk. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11K http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11K.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

3

3.2 TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES The target population of the study was the Students of Gomal University, 7,942 enrolled during 2017-18. A sample of 292 students was computed by using the statistics of a pilot study with the help of a standard formula for a finite population ((SD*SD)/((E*E)/(Z*Z))+((SD*SD)/N)). Both literature and field surveys were used for data collection. Likewise, for data analysis, ‘thematic analysis’ was used for qualitative analysis and SPSS®22 was applied for the testing of hypotheses.

3.3 RELIABILITY & VALIDITY Table 1 shows the reliability statistics of variables. It can be seen that all the three variables have Cronbach’s alpha statistics greater than 0.7, thus, it is considered that the instrument is reliable.

Table 1: Reliability statistics 1 2 3

Factor/Component/Variable Participative Decision Making Transformational Leadership Transactional Leadership Questionnaire

Items 9 9 8 26

Alpha 0.997 0.881 0.934 0.796

4. FINDINGS OF THE STUDY 4.1 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS Table 2 shows the gender-wise and qualification-wise frequency of respondents. Here, out of 292 respondents, 187 were male and 105 were female. Similarly, 132 were enrolled in graduate programs and 160 were enrolled in post-graduate programs.

Table 3 shows the range, average and standard deviation of each of the three variables (independent and dependent) used in this study.

Table 2: Gender/qualification cross-tabulation Gender Male Female Total

Qualification Post-Graduate Graduate 118 69 42 63 160 132

Total 187 105 292

Table 3: Range, average and dispersion Variables Participative Decision Making Transformational Leadership Transactional Leadership

N 292 292 292

Min 2.00 1.89 1.00

Max 5.00 4.11 4.00

Mean 3.520 2.998 2.774

SD 0.905 0.511 0.834

4.2 TESTING OF HYPOTHESES Hypothesis # 1: PDM is Significantly Associated with TRF and TRS. Table 4: Correlations Participative Decision Making R 0.752** Sig. (2-tailed) <0.001 Transactional Leadership R -0.677** Sig. (2-tailed) <0.001 **. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed).

Transformational Leadership

Transformational Leadership 1 -0.466** <0.001

Analysis: It can be seen in Table 4 that participative decision making has a significant

4

M.Siddique , A.Nawaz

correlation with both Transformational and Transactional leadership due to their respective p-values (Sig.) <0.001, <0.001. However, PDM has positive correlation with the Transformational leadership (r = 0.752), but it has negative correlation with the Transactional leadership (r = - 0.677). It verifies the relationship that as and when the Participative decision-making increases, it brings an increase in the Transformational leadership, meanwhile it causes a decrease in the Transactional leadership.

Hence, the hypothesis is concluded as true that the PDM has effectiveness correlation with the leadership styles (both Transformational and Transactional).

H2: PDM significantly explains variation in TRF. Analysis: In Table 5 the value of R2 = 0.565 shows the overall effect of Participative decision making on Transformational leadership. It means 56.5% variation is being caused in Transformational leadership due to variation in Participative decision making.

Table 5: Model summary of TRF Model R R2 Adjusted R2 S.E F a 1 0.752 0.565 0.564 .33747 375.817 a. Predictors: (Constant), Participative Decision Making a. Dependent Variable: Transformational Leadership

Sig. <0.001b

Table 6: Beta statistics of PDM on TRF Model 1

(Constant) Participative Decision Making

Unstandardized Coefficients β S.E 1.503 .080 .425 .022

Standardized Coefficients β .752

T

Sig.

18.882 19.386

<0.001 <0.001

Analysis: Table 6 shows the individual impact of Participative decision making on Transformation leadership, i.e., β = 0.425 (42.5%). It means that if we bring 1 standard deviation change in the participative decision making, it will bring 0.425 standard deviation change in the Transformational leadership. Thus, the hypothesis is accepted as true that PDM affects Transformational leadership.

H3: PDM significantly predicts TRS. Analysis: In Table 7 the value of R2 = 0.458 shows the overall effect of Participative decision on Transactional leadership style. It shows that 45.8% variation is being brought in Transactional leadership due to variation in the Participative decision making.

Table 7: Model summary of TRS Model R R2 Adjusted R2 S.E. F a 1 0.677 0.458 0.456 0.615 244.54 a. Predictors: (Constant), Participative Decision Making a. Dependent Variable: Transactional Leadership

Sig. <0.001b

Table 8: Beta statistics of PDM on TRS Model 1

(Constant) Participative Decision Making

Unstandardized Coefficients β S.E 4.970 0.145 -.624 0.040

Standardized Coefficients β -.677

T

Sig.

34.279 -15.638

<0.001 <0.001

*Corresponding author (M.Siddique and A.Nawaz). Tel: +92-3339990721 E-mail: mpasiddique@gmail.com, profallahnawaz@gu.edu.pk. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11K http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11K.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

5

Analysis: In Table 8, the individual impact of Participative decision making on Transactional leadership is β = - 0.624, which shows that if we bring 1 standard deviation variation in Participative decision making, it will result in – 62.4% variation in the Transactional leadership style. Here, the negative value of β shows that the participative decision making has negative effects on Transactional leadership style. This is because the participative decision making weakens the role of Transactional leader. Thus, the hypothesis is accepted as TRUE. Table 9 shows the group statistics (Frequency, Arithmetic mean, Standard Deviation, and Standard Error) of both Male and Female respondents of the study.

Table 9: Group statistics (gender-wise) Participative Decision Making Transformational Leadership Transactional Leadership

Gender Male Female Male Female Male Female

N 187 105 187 105 187 105

Mean 3.65 3.28 3.05 2.91 2.71 2.88

S.D 0.842 0.966 0.505 0.510 0.828 0.836

S.E 0.062 0.094 0.037 0.050 0.061 0.082

H4: The mean score of male respondents is higher than female respondents.

Analysis: In Table 10, it can be seen that the p-values of Participative decision making and Transformational leadership are 0.001 and 0.022 respectively, falling below the range of 0.05 (maximum allowed error). Whereas, the p-value of Transactional leadership is 0.099 which is quite higher than the maximum allowed error of 0.05. Thus, the hypothesis has got the support of only two variables. Hence, the hypothesis is partially accepted with 2/3 variables’ support.

Table 10: Independent samples t-test Variables

F Sig. t Df EVA 5.737 0.017 3.416 290 Participative Decision Making EVNA 3.288 192.39 EVA 0.251 0.617 2.305 290 Transformational Leadership EVNA 2.299 214.13 EVA 0.086 0.770 -1.655 290 Transactional Leadership EVNA -1.651 214.07 Key: EVA – Equal variance assumed; EVNA – Equal variance not assumed

Sig. (2-tailed) 0.001 0.001 0.022 0.022 0.099 0.100

Table 11: Group statistics (qualification-wise) Variables Participative Decision Making Transformational Leadership Transactional Leadership

Qualification Post-Graduate Graduate Post-Graduate Graduate Post-Graduate Graduate

N 160 132 160 132 160 132

Mean 3.918 3.041 3.175 2.785 2.562 3.028

SD 0.739 0.854 0.493 0.448 0.749 0.862

SE 0.059 0.074 0.039 0.039 0.059 0.075

Table 11 shows the group statistics (Frequency, Arithmetic mean, Standard Deviation, and Standard Error) of both Post-graduate and Under-graduate respondents of the study.

H5: The mean score of Post Graduates is higher than Graduates in PDM & TRF. Analysis: Table 12 shows that the p-values of Participative decision making, Transformational

6

M.Siddique , A.Nawaz

leadership, and the Transactional leadership are 0.000, 0.000, and 0.000 respectively, falling below the range of 0.05. Here, in this case, the hypothesis has got the full support of all the three variables.

Hence, the hypothesis is fully accepted with the support of all variables.

Table 12: Independent Samples t-Test Variables

F Sig. t Df EVA 9.913 0.002 9.388 290 Participative Decision Making EVNA 9.263 260.921 EVA 1.100 0.295 7.016 290 Transformational Leadership EVNA 7.078 286.539 EVA 4.005 0.046 -4.939 290 Transactional Leadership EVNA -4.875 261.443 Key: EVA – Equal variance assumed; EVNA – Equal variance not assumed

Sig. (2-tailed) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

5. CONCLUSION Participative decision making is widely suggested as the best tool for employee empowerment and motivation in all types of organizations. It actually enables the organization to capitalize not only on the explicit knowledge but also implicit knowledge of the workforce as well as stay innovative.

This kind of work environment is more expected under the transformational leadership style because transactional leadership rather prefers going by the rules and regulations or explicitly documented knowledge of the organization.

From the current research findings, it can be concluded that PDM supports TRF and has a negative link with TRS. It is therefore incumbent for the management to provide PDM environment with transformational styles, for the better performance and popularity of TRF. PDM supports and strengthens TRF and likewise, TRF is the best leadership style to take advantage of PDM. Further, demographic attributes of the respondents are also creating group mean differences in all the research variables. These differences need the attention of the stakeholders to manage the lower scores positively.

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data used or generated from this study is available upon request to the corresponding author.

7. REFERENCES Bass, B.M., & Riggio, R.E. (2006). Transformational Leadership, 2nd Edition. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Mahwah, NJ. Cotton, J. L., Vollrath, D. A., Froggatt, K. L., LengnickHall, M. L., & Jennings, K. R. 1988. Employee participation: Diverse forms and different outcomes. Academy of Management Review, 13: 8-22.

Dartey-Baaha, K., and Mekporb, B. (2017). Emotional Intelligence: Does Leadership Matter? Employees Perception in Ghana’s Banking Sector. International Journal of Business, 22(1), 41-54.

Kotur, B.R., & Anbazhagan, S. (2014). The Influence of Age and Gender on the Leadership Styles, IOSR Journal of Business Management, 16(1)- III: 30-36.

Maria, B. (2012). The Relationship between Leadership Effectiveness and Organizational Performance.

Journal of Defence Resource Management, 3(1). *Corresponding author (M.Siddique and A.Nawaz). Tel: +92-3339990721 E-mail: mpasiddique@gmail.com, profallahnawaz@gu.edu.pk. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11K http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11K.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.140

7

Miller, K. I., & Monge, P. R. 1986. Participation, satisfaction, and productivity: A meta-analytic review.

Academy of Management Journal, 29: 727-753.

Mischel, L. J., & Northcraft, G. B. 1997. "I think we can, I think we can ... " The role of efficacy beliefs in group and team effectiveness. In B. Markovsky et al. (Eds.), Advances in group processes: 177-197. Greenwich, GT: JAI Press. Mitchell, T. R. 1973. Motivation and participation: An integration. Academy of Management Journal, 16: 670-679.

Mohiuddin, Z. A. (2017). Influence of Leadership Style on Employees Performance: Evidence from Literatures. Journal of Marketing and Management, 8(1), 18-30 Nikolaou, I., Gouras, A., Vakola, M., & Bourantas, D. (2007). Selecting Change Agents: Exploring Traits and Skills in a Simulated Environment. Journal of Change Management, 7(3–4): 291–313.

Odumeru, J.A., & Ifeanyi, G.O. (2013). Transformational vs. Transactional Leadership Theories: Evidence in Literature. International Review of Management and Business Research, 2(2): 355-361.

Patel, G., and Buiting, S. (2013). Gender Difference in Leadership Styles and the Impact within Corporate Boards. Commissioned by the Commonwealth Secretariat, Social Transformation Programmes Division.

Robbins, S.P., Bergman, R., Stagg, I., & Coulter, M. (2012). Management, (6th Ed.). Pearson Education Australia.

Siddique, M., Nawaz, A. (2019). The Mediation of Transformational Leadership Between Transactional Leadership and Group Management Skills of Academicians in HEIs of KPK, Pakistan.

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. 10(8), 1041-1051.

Zumitzavan, V., & Udchachone, S. (2014). The Influence of Leadership Styles on Organizational Performance Mediated by Organizational Innovation: A Case Study of the Hospitality Industry in Thailand. Recent Advances in Economics, Management, and Development.

Dr.Muhammad Siddique is Lecturer at Institute of Political and Administrative Sciences (IPAS), Gomal University, DIK, KPK, Pakistan. He earned his Master’s degree in Management Studies, and a PhD from Gomal University, Pakistan. He is interested in Management Studies.

Professor Dr.Allah Nawaz is Professor at Department of Public Administration, Gomal University, D.I. Khan, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan. His research is in the field of Computer-based Information Systems and HRM.

Note: The information and data in this article are drawn from the PhD’s Thesis of Muhammad Siddique, entitled “Cultural Mediation between Teachers' Interpersonal Skills and Leadership Styles in Public Sector Universities of Khyber Pakhtoonkhwa, Pakistan”, submitted to Gomal University, Pakistan, 2018.

Trademarks Disclaimer: All products names including trademarks™ or registered® trademarks mentioned in this article are the property of their respective owners, using for identification purposes only. Use of them does not imply any endorsement or affiliation.

8

M.Siddique , A.Nawaz

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11L

BUSINESS STRATEGY, EARNINGS MANAGEMENT, AND IT MANAGEMENT Mohammad Reza Pourali a*, Mahmood Samadi Largani b, Hadi Hasanpour b, Mohaddeseh Ebrahimi b a b

Department of Accounting, Chalous Branch, Islamic Azad University, Chalous, IRAN Department of Accounting, Tonekabon Branch, Islamic Azad University, Tonekabon, IRAN

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history Received 07 March 2019 Received in revised form 08 July 2019 Accepted 25 July 2019 Available online 02 August 2019

One of the reasons for the high rate of failure of strategic planning in organizations is an overemphasis on one factor and the lack of full attention to other organizational factors. Meanwhile, an assessment of the readiness of the organization for the convergence of information technology and business strategy should be considered as the starting point and start of the activity of comprehensive IT plans. The purpose of Keywords: this study is to examine business strategy and earning management in Tehran Stock Exchange; Strategic IT order to achieve IT management in companies admitted to Tehran Stock management; Business Exchange during the years 2012 to 2016. For this purpose, a sample of 68 firms was selected by systematic knockout. In this research, earnings strategy with IT; management is based on the modified Jones model and, finally, the Business and R&D; Mils and Snow model; outcome of the study is to examine the effect of variables on the Modified Jones model: macroeconomic level with the aim of achieving strategic IT management.

Strategic alignment.

The result of the research suggests a reverse and significant relationship between business strategy and earnings management in order to achieve IT management. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION Given the wide-ranging development of information technology (IT) and its impact on different levels of organizations, the need for the use of strategic IT-applications has become more evident.

These plans are designed and implemented in order to achieve a systematic approach to the field of investment and obtain better results in this area of design (Turban, 2005). Therefore, the strategic use of IT has become a key factor for organizations in gaining competitive advantage and also aligning IT strategies with organizational goals (Luftman, 2000).

One of the key factors is strategic planning. Today, strategic information planning is one of the most important components of the integration and alignment of business and IT strategies (Bai Rong, 2003). Strategic IT management should be aligned with comprehensive organization planning. In *Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

1

fact, the IT department and other units must work for the organization common goals (Luftman, 2000). What we have considered in this research, the achievement of strategic IT management refers to the proper use of IT to realize the goals and strategies of business organizations (Bruls, 2003, Tallon, 1999). Based on this, before spending a lot of money on the development and implementation of strategic IT programs, the organization must evaluate its capabilities for the alignment of IT and its business strategy in different organizational subdivisions. If there are any deficiencies to fix or improve them (Luftman, 1999). Considering that in our country the use of IT is a relatively new topic and sees many challenges ahead of us. One of the most important issues in this regard is the proper strategic planning of IT in line with the corporate business strategy in order to achieve strategic management by means of a positive and correct relationship between business strategy and IT efficiently and effectively (Niederman , 1991).

2. THEORETICAL FUNDAMENTALS AND RESEARCH BACKGROUND Strategic alignment refers to the integration and coordination of IT applications and the organization's goals in line with its business strategy. In this area, not only IT programs should reflect the goals, mission, and business strategies, but business plans should also serve as a reference point for the IT program, its specific technology applications. The importance of the convergence of information technology and business strategies of the organization since the 1970s by individuals and organizations such as Mc Lind and Soden (1977) IBM (1981), Mils and Snow (1986), Dixon Willie (1989), Nidrman 1991), Henderson Van Catherine (1996), Louftman and Breyer (1999), were identified and analyzed. During these years, the issue of alignment has always been one of the most important concerns of senior business executives and IT organizations. Although this topic is now one of the main concerns of many of the managers of the organizations. Obviously, the importance of this category will increase in the eyes of organizations as the business strategies become more streamlined and the rapid growth of IT (Luftman 1995, 1996). In such a situation, maintenance of proper alignment and proper routing of the business strategy and IT of the organization will require efficient and complex management processes (Luftman 2000). The importance of strategic alignment simultaneously increases with the efforts of today's companies to increase the integrity of the business and IT strategies (Luftman 1995, 1996, 1999). Perhaps this is due to the fact that the hemorrhage coincides both the headings of effectiveness and effectiveness.

3. BUSINESS STRATEGY One important factor in the success of organizations is their designing but not from traditional perspectives. Its strategy-based structure is a vital process. So, the organization structural basis clarifies the level of authority and responsibilities of each unit on the way of achieving missions and strategic goals and organizes the duties in various forms according to the chosen model. By this way, the powers and authorities of organizational units in relation to the cultural position, the organization posts and powers will be clarified by skills, abilities, and conditions (Atabaki, 2009). And clarifies strategic management the art of assessing decisions that enable the organization to achieve long-term goals that are in three levels of 1.writing strategies 2.Administering strategies, 3.Assessment of strategies that are administered in three levels: 1. Company level, 2.Strategic business level, 3.Duties level.

2

M.R. Pourali, M.S.Largani, H.Hasanpour, M.Ebrahimi

In this research, business strategy (STRT) is one of the research variables and for its assessment they use strategic grade. The strategic grade is made clear by the relation of research and development (R&D) to sales, the relation of R&D cost to the number of employees, the relation of employees to sales and the relation of market value to relative values. This index is clarified among 4 to 16 that before 10 is related to defensive companies and after 10 is for focused companies. This research, by calculation and assessing average of scores, the companies are divided into focused and defensive (Snow and Hambrick, 1980).

4. FOCUSED STRATEGIES (OFFENSIVE) The features of this type of business strategy include: Influence in market: raising share for present products or services through increasing attempts in marketing includes increasing number of sellers, increasing and strengthening public relations and advertisements, development of market: providing services and existing products to new geographic areas, development of product: raising sales through improving existing products and services or providing new types of that products or services. This strategy requires more costs for R&D.

4.1 DEFENSIVE STRATEGIES The features of this type of business strategy include: Cooperation: in administering this strategy, two or more companies form a joint venture or a consortium and use the most of the opportunities. Samples of these companies are R&D joint company, distribution of goods and etc. and for a company to be successful; each company should have some special features like advanced technology, distribution system, and research unit or production powers.

Decrease: the new grouping in assets and costs for reversing the decreasing mode and benefits.

The goal of decrease is that organization fixes itself in a special mode.

Transferring: selling an independent unit or leaving a part of the organization to others is called transferring. This strategy is used mostly for providing capital. Sometimes it's a part of the strategy of renewing structure because the company tries sale those units which are useful or need more capital.

Dissolution: selling all assets to its actual value is called dissolution. This feature is a fail for the company but form feeling points of view is a very difficult strategy.

Mixture: most of the companies are willing to mix two or more strategies at the same time and if the amount of this activity exceeds more, the strategy of mixing will become more dangerous (Fred, R, David, 2007).

4.2 CONCEPT OF EARNING MANAGEMENT Earning management occurs when it manages its own judgment in financial reporting and transaction structure. In such a way as to provide alternative reporting on company performance to mislead some stakeholders (Hallie and Wallen, 1998).

Bidleyman says earning management is an attempt by company management to try to reduce abnormal gains. Earnings management can be viewed from either a contractual perspective or *Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

3

financial reporting. From a contractual perspective, Earnings management can be considered as a low-cost way to protect companies against unexpected outcomes in the context of intangible and incomplete contracts. From the perspective of financial reporting, management may be able to influence the stock market value through Earnings management. For example, management may want to present an ever-increasing picture of profit, with the technique of smoothing profits over time.

In the securities market, management is required to publish intra-organizational information.

Therefore, Earnings management can be used as a tool for transferring in-organizational management information to investors. Both contractual and reporting styles can lead to interesting and perhaps surprising results, and that Earnings management can be somewhat good (Dichu, 2002).

In any case, some managers may misuse earnings management. Managers can use profits management in their favor and at the expense of other parties to the contract. Management is in the choice of accounting procedures among accepted procedures .So, it's natural to expect management to choose methods that maximize its benefits and utility. And that would increase the value of the company's stock market, and this is the management of profits. Accountants should have knowledge of earnings management since this knowledge will increase the understanding of accountants from the use of net profit for investors or any other beneficiary. And fosters better accounting reporting by accountants (McQuey, 2006).

4.3 IT MANAGEMENT An interdisciplinary knowledge in which all technological resources are managed in accordance with the needs and priorities of modern technology. These resources may include tangible investments such as software, data, network, and data center facilities that are maintained by the staff from those resources .The responsibility for IT management in a company includes many basic functions of management, such as budget, human resources and organization, and control. IT management can be combined with related to technology, e.g. software design, network planning, technical support, change management, etc.

IT management is the process by which all IT resources are managed consistent with the priorities and needs. This management includes tangible resources such as networks, computers and data equipment, as well as intangible resources such as software and data .This is to use of technology to generate value through IT management with the alignment of business and technology strategies.

While creating value for an organization involves a network of relationships between the internal and external environment, technology plays an important role in improving the entire chain of an organization. However, this increase (values) requires business and technology management along with innovative, team-intensive and energetic work.

Nurul Houqe et al. (2015), using a strategic typology of Miles and Snow (1978), studied this issue that whether the business strategy is in connection with benefits quality. They divided the reviewed companies in this research in two categories of defensive and offensive strategies. Results indicated that the companies with defensive strategy have higher levels of earnings management and the companies of offensive strategy have higher levels of accounting conservatism. Also, they found that the connection between business strategy and benefit quality changes in economic growth or its ascending periods. It means that in the economic growth period, the companies show lower levels of accounting conservatism.

4

M.R. Pourali, M.S.Largani, H.Hasanpour, M.Ebrahimi

Hasanpour (2014), via the strategic typology of Miles and Snow (1978), reviewed the business strategy and earnings management. They, the same as Miles and Snow (1978), divided companies into two groups of defensive and offensive. Results indicated that in the growth period of economy, the companies with defensive business strategy apply lower accounting conservatism.

Park & Jang (2013) examined a company's diversity strategy and performance strategy. The results showed that free cash flow increases the diversity of firms. Also, the results indicate that financial leverage is an effective way to reduce free cash flow and improve corporate performance, and this role is more significant in companies with a diversity strategy. The researchers found that financial leverage directly reduced the negative effects of dispersion on company performance and reduced the opportunities for managers to adopt inefficient diversification strategies.

Nurul Houqe (2013) examined the relationship between a defensive and aggressive strategy with earnings quality in macroeconomic conditions. They concluded that with high economic growth, exploratory companies have conservative accounting. Resilient companies also have more earning management. In a period of low economic growth, exploration companies are reporting conservative.

While resilient firms are aggressively involved in earning management.

Rhys (2006) considered the type of strategy as the main factor for organizational performance in the public sector. They argue that the type and content of an organization's strategy consist of two dimensions: first, the type and type of strategy selection, which kind of strategy is. (Aggressive, defensive, etc.), and secondly, the strategy's actions are a relative emphasis on changes in the market, services, income, foreign relations, and internal characteristics. Their statistical results indicate that organizational strategy and performance with a defensive strategy have a positive relationship with a forward-looking or aggressive strategy. In this research, the organization achieves high levels of organizational performance in its path. If partly based on an innovative strategy that is constantly looking for the outside world to find new markets. Also, the results strongly suggest that the content of the strategy causes a difference in the performance of public organizations.

In recent years, a wide range of research and analysis has focused on the combination of information technology and business (Davidson, 1996. Leganza, 2003. Luftman, 1999, 2001). The organization has a role of partnership between IT and business management (Henderson 1999). Work and understanding of the competitive use of information technology that leads to a change in business strategies (Norton 1999). Innovation-driven information technology not only changes the range of organizations but also changes their infrastructure (Feluer, 2002: Kazman, 2002: Rosser, 1999).

Although many of the above studies have been conducted in empirical studies only in one profession or industry and are not capable of generalization for other domains, they are the basis for identifying many of the factors affecting strategic alignment.

5. METHOD The surveyed population consists of companies admitted to the Tehran Stock Exchange. The years covered by the research topic 2012 to 2016 and the hypotheses in relation to this statistical population will be studied and tested. Due to the systematic elimination of qualified companies, 68 companies are being analyzed for the subject matter of the research. This research is applied research *Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

5

in terms of the purpose. The study results can be applied in practice. Considering that this research uses past information to test hypotheses, it is a type of post-event research. Research theoretically is a kind of provocative research and inductive type of reasoning. On the other hand, this research is quasi-experimental research in the field of financial accounting research.

The library method is used to collect information, including books, journals, dissertations, articles, and the Internet. This method is used to conduct a preliminary study, a compilation of the chapter of the research literature and the theoretical framework of the research. Then we will look at the group of companies listed on the stock exchange to collect data about the research hypothesis.

After extracting the required information through Tadbir Pardaz software, rahavard novin software and databases of the Stock Exchange and aggregating data in Excel columns and transferring it to Eviews 8 software, testing and analyzing the results for decision making from the research hypothesis.

In this research, we first classify the business strategy using the Mils and Snow model (1978). In the beginning, companies are divided into two groups of firms with an aggressive and defensive business strategy. With regard to the characteristics and characteristics of each category of business strategies, aggressive strategies representing earning management and defensive strategy represent conservatism in the company. Then, according to Jones's modified model (Dechow, 1995), we will calculate the earning management for companies with an aggressive business strategy to examine the existence of a meaningful relationship in the first hypothesis. Then, after the first hypothesis is meaningful, we examine the second hypothesis through the involvement of the interventional and control variables in the research, and we conclude the final conclusion in this regard. Whether there is a meaningful relationship between business strategy and earnings management and IT management.

Also, in this research, the statistical society is selected among the companies active in the stock market. And with the help of Eviews software, we analyze the data. According to the stated issues, the main issue of the research is to achieve strategic IT management by examining the relationship between business strategy and earning management. Thus, the first hypothesis of the research and the statistical model of the research are as follows: There is a meaningful relationship between earnings management and the aggressive business strategy of the listed companies in Tehran Stock Exchange.

In this model; (Nurul Houqe, 2015) Business Strategy (STRT) |DACCRit|= β0 + β1 Strtit + β2 ln_Assetsit + β3 F_Levit + β4G_Salesit + β5M_Riskit+ εit (1).

5.1 CONCEPTUAL DEFINITION Formulating a strategy that is often referred to as long-term strategic planning. It is the design of the mission, the goals and policies of the company, the formulation of strategy begin with the analysis of the position. Situation analysis is to find a strategy or strategic balance between opportunities (external) and strengths (internal) with respect to the threats (external) of the weaknesses (internal) in order to eliminate them.

Operational definition: To calculate it for each company, a hybrid strategy rating is used.

Combined rank using the ratio of R&D to sales, the ratio of R&D to the number of employees, the ratio of employees to sales, and the ratio of market value to book value. The average of this indicator is that before the average number for defensive companies and after the average for the aggressive companies. In this study, using the above ratios and calculating the average of the numbers obtained,

6

M.R. Pourali, M.S.Largani, H.Hasanpour, M.Ebrahimi

companies are divided into offensive and defensive categories (Snow and Hambrick, 1980).

According to the stated content and the division of strategies into two categories of offensive and defensive, ultimately the final information is presented in Table 1.

Table 1: Business categorization into offensive and defensive Variable Average maximum minimum SD

DACCR -2.06 0 76.4 -48.9

Strt DF 0.79 1.00 0.00 0.017

Strt AT 0.21 1.00 0.00 0.019

Ln-Assets 13.1 18.19 10.56 1.42

F_Lev 0.684 8.61 15 0.376

G_Sales 0.128 2.03 -0.95 0.29

CFO 0.196 1.58 -1.12 4.62

LESS 0.08 2.14 0.00 0.87

According to the results obtained from the computational ratios of business strategies and according to the results of the table above, firms with a defensive business strategy of 79% and firms with an aggressive business strategy of 21%. That companies with a defensive business strategy have conservatism and companies with aggressive business strategy with earning management. In this research, the type of earnings management in accounting is considered by the business strategy evaluation, which is tested through the DACCR relationship.

In the next step, we will examine the business strategy through the relationship between earning management and relationship management (DACCR). The reason for accounting conservatism selection is based on Nurul Houqe (2015). In that research, in addition to classifying firms into aggressive and defensive, conservatism in accounting is synonymous with defensive business strategy and earning management as synonymous with aggressive business strategy. For this reason, because we get a greater percentage of the points we get, we measure the four ratios we measure in order to divide business strategies into an aggressive business strategy, which is also a row of managers with an eaning management thinking.

5.2 EARNING MANAGEMENT (DACCR) Conceptual concept: Earning management means the process of carrying out the deliberate steps within the framework of accepted accounting principles, which enables managers to bring the reported profit to their optimal level (Nazemi Atabaki, 2009).

Operational Definition: To calculate earning management, the Jones model will be used.

TAit / Ai,t-1 = β0(1 / Ai.t-0)+β1(∆REV it/ Ait-1)+β2(PPE it/ Ait-1)+ εit

(2),

wherein: TA: Accumulation of accruals in year t for i, Ait-1: accruals accrued by the end of the previous year for i. ΔREV: Change in annual income.

PPEit: Property and equipment of the same year (fixed assets each year after deductions accumulated) in year t for i. εit: model error in year t for company i, B: Parameters of each company that is estimated by multivariable regression.

STRT: The business strategy achieved through 4 ratios.

Ln-Assets: The natural logarithm of the total assets of i in year t.

F_Lev: The ratio of total debt to total assets of the company i in year t. *Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

7

G_Sales: The sales growth rate of the company is achieved by selling this year to the previous year's sales breakdown by sales of the previous year.

M-Risk: a systematic risk measurement indicator that shows the relation between stock variability and market variability.

CFO: Operating cash flow for the company i in year t is obtained through the total assets.

LOSS: loss takes the value of 1 if firm i in year t reports negative income before extraordinary items and 0 otherwise.

Table 2: Model fitting. |DACCRit|= β0 + β1 Strtit + β2 ln_Assetsit + β3 F_Levit Research model + β4G_Salesit + β5M_Riskit+ εit Descriptive variables Offensive Strt Defensive Strt Ln Assets F Lev G Sales CFO Loss Values for F test P-value Model result

Model variable Statistical T P-value result 0.19 5.69 <0.01 Meaningful 0.13 4.32 <0.01 Meaningful 0.089 2.44 <0.01 Meaningful 0.11 5.63 <0.01 Meaningful 0.12 4.89 <0.01 Meaningful -0.076 -3.16 0.12 Meaningless 0.002 8.54 0.23 Meaningless 53.68 Test of Durbin-Watson 1.87 <0.01 Values for adjusted indexes 0.38 According to F values and P-value that is lower than 5 percent, the relationship is meaningful.

Table 2, the result from regression indicates that the adjusted value index of research model is 0.38 and this could determine 38 percent of changes in the dependent variable by changes in the independent variable. Durbin-Watson result for this model is between 1.5 to 2.5. So, there is not any self-dependency among the errors of regression samples.

Meaningful level of F value for the research model is lower than the level of testing error (0.05-α) and thus H0 hypothesis is rejected and the resulted regressions are meaningful statistically, under linear relationship between variables. So, the results are not consistent with the claims of the second hypothesis. The statistical hypothesis related to the second hypothesis is as followings.

In the next, given that the number of companies with aggressive business strategy varies from 21 percent to 79 percent of companies with defensive business strategies. Also, according to the first model of research in Table 2, it finds that there is no meaningful relationship between companies with aggressive business strategy and earning management. We present a combination of business strategy and earning management and IT in a macroeconomic field for achieving strategic IT. In this way, the second hypothesis will be modeled as: There is a meaningful relationship between earnings management and business strategy in order to achieve IT management.

MIT- STRT = 𝜷𝟎 + 𝜷𝟏 STRTit + 𝜷𝟐 GDP –Dummy + 𝜷𝟑 STRT*GDP-Dummy + 𝜷𝟒 Industry-Dummy + 𝜷𝟓 SDCNICT + 𝜷𝟔 SDCICT + 𝜺+it

(3).

Conceptual Definition: IT management refers to the activities of IT managers in organizations.

More information management systems are focused on the business aspects with a strong entry into

8

M.R. Pourali, M.S.Largani, H.Hasanpour, M.Ebrahimi

the business enterprise technology phase.

For this, the variables are named as followings: M-STRT-IT: Strategic Management IT GDP-DUMMY: national GDP during the research period.

STRT*GDP-DUMMY: the result of business strategy in GDP. INDUSTRY-DUMMY: is the GDP of industry.

SNCNICT: the relation of non-communication investment in GDP SDCICT: the relation of communication investment in GDP Meanwhile, to calculate GDP, because of the lack of figures and the gross amount of binary variables or control variables are used. Namely, in the five years of research under investigation, in the years when the national native land is in favorable condition, it is equal to 1, and in the years when these conditions are in a recession, it will amount to 0.

Also, for the calculation of SCNICY and SDCICT, we’ll score the companies according to 636 companies in testing among stock exchange companies and will be based on the results of this statistical society as well as remained companies of this society and according to the presented information in fiscal notes in order to formulate the statistical model of second hypothesis: According to the results obtained from the first hypothesis and the meaninglessness of the relationship in the first hypothesis of the research, the second hypothesis of the study does not deal with the investigation of the relationship between the first hypothesis in its macroeconomic conditions.

6. CONCLUSION In general, in this research, we first divided the strategies of the companies active in the stock into offensive and defensive categories. Then, we choose the most tend toward the dominant strategy because of the characteristics of the statistical community. And according to the type of division in Nurul Houqe's (2015) research, we measured the companies' willingness to manage them (conservatism in accounting and earning management) and its relationship with business strategy.

Finally, we measured this relationship with the variables involved with the information technology at the macroeconomic level. In order to get the kind of relationship between business strategy and earning management in order to achieve the final results of the survey, we examine the relationship between business strategy and earning management in terms of information technology management in Tehran Stock Exchange. The results of the first hypothesis of the research indicate that most companies that have an aggressive business strategy in the capital market are looking for new markets for new sales and looking for conditions that can expand the company. Therefore, the management of these companies, which are constantly growing in terms of their financial and sales processes, are less likely to seek the earning management.

Also, to investigate the relationship between the significance of the second and final hypothesis of the research, the study of the relationship between business strategy and earning management in *Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

9

terms of IT management in Tehran Stock Exchange, need to have a positive and significant relationship in the first hypothesis of the research in order to add macroeconomic variables In the relationship and study of the general topic of the research. Therefore, considering that the initial hypothesis of the research has no positive and significant relationship between the independent and dependent variable. Therefore, there is no longer any need to examine the governing relationship in the second hypothesis. And the results indicate a negative relationship and a lack of meaningful relationship between business strategy and management and earning and management of IT in order to achieve strategic IT management.

7. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data is used or generated from this study is available upon request to the corresponding author.

8. REFERENCES Atabaki, Mohsen Seyfi, Abbas (2009). Comparing Organizational Structure with Business Strategies, Journal of Tadbir. 21-25, No. 208.

Bai. Rong. Ji & Lee. Gwo. Guang, (2003). “Organizational Factors Influencing The Quality Of IS/ IT Strategic Planning Process”, National Taiwan University of Science.

Bruls,W.A.G, (2003).“Representing Business/ IT Alignment in the Enterprise Planning Cycle”, IBM Global Service.

David, Fred R. (2007). Strategic Management. Translation by Ali Parsaean and Seyyed Mohammad Arabi, Tehran: Cultural Research Office.

Davidson, W. (1996) "Managing the Business Transformation Process," in J. N. Luftman (ed.)

Competing in the Information Age. New York: Oxford University Press.

Dechow, P.M., R.G. Sloan & A.P. Sweeney. (1995). Detecting Earnings Management, The Accounting Review, 70, 193-225.

Feluer. Rainer, Kazem Chaharbaghi, Michael Weber and John Wargin. (2002). Aligning Strategies, process, and information technology: a case study. A CRC Press Co., pp 11-28.

Hasanpour, Hadi (2015). The Relationship between Business Strategy and Earning Quality in Tehran Stock Exchange. Master's Degree Thesis in Accounting: Tehran University of Science and Research.

Henderson & J. C & H. Venkatraman, (1999). “Strategic Alignment: Leveraging Information Technology for Transforming Organizations”, IBM Systems Journal.

Kazman. R & Chen. H.M, (2002). “Aligning Business Models, Business Architecture, and IT Architecture”.

Leganza. G, (2003). Overcoming Obstacles to Alignment of IT and the Business.

Luftman J. & Papp R. & Brier T., (1999). Enablers and inhibitors of business-IT alignment.

Communications of the Association for Information Systems, 1(11), 1-33.

Luftman, J. & Brier, T. (1999). Achieving and Sustaining Business-IT Alignment. California Management Review, No.1, 109122.

Luftman, J., (1996). Applying the strategic alignment model. In J. Luftman (Ed.), Competing in the Information Age (pp. 43-69). New York: Oxford University Press.

10

M.R. Pourali, M.S.Largani, H.Hasanpour, M.Ebrahimi

Luftman. J., (2000). “Assessing Business-IT Alagnment Maturity”. luftman.J & Lewis. N & Oldach. P.R & Scott. H. (2001). “Transforming the Enterprise: The Alignment of Business and Information Technology Strategies”, IBM Systems Journal.

Miles, R.E., Snow, C.C. (1978). Organizational strategy, structure and process, New York, McGraw-Hill.

Muhammad Nurul Houqe and Ryan Kerr. (2013) Business Strategy and Earnings Quality. http://ssrn.com,1-32.

Muhammad Nurul Houqe and Ryan Kerr. (2015). Business strategy, economic growth, and earnings quality.

Niederman, F. Brancheau, J.C., Wetherbe, J.C. (1991). Information systems management issues for the 1990s. MIS Quarterly, 17(4), 475-500.

Park, K. and S. Jang. (2013). Capital Structure, Free Cash Flow, Diversification and Firm Performance: A Holistic Analysis. International Journal of Hospitality Management. 33, 51-63.

Rhys Andrews, George A. Boyne, and Richard M. Walker. (2006)." Strategy Content and Organizational Performance: An Empirical Analysis” Public Administration Review.

February : 63-52.

Rosser. B, (1999). “Aligning IM/ IT with Business Direction”.

Snow, C. C., & Hambrick, D. C. (1980). Measuring Organizational Strategies: Some Theoretical and Methodological Problems. The Academy of Management Review, 5(4), 527-538.

Tallon. P.P & Kraemer. K.L. (1999). “A Process Oriented Assesment of the Alignment of Information Systems and Business Strategy: Implication for IT-Business Value”.

Turban. (2005). “Information Technology for Management”, Wiley, New York.

Dr.Mahmood Reza Pourali is an Associate Professor at Department of Accounting, Chalos Islamic Azad University. He got a PhD in Accounting. His research is in Modern Marketing

Dr.Mahmood Samadi an Associate Professor at Accounting Department the Tonekabon Islamic Azad University, Iran. He got his PhD in Accounting. His research encompasses Business Management and Analysis.

Hadi Hasanpour is a PhD student in Accounting, Islamic Azad University, Tonkabon Branch, Iran. He is a Teacher in Islamic Azad University, Financial and Economic Advisor, Contract Advisor, and financial manager In different companies and A financial expert at the City Bank and Researcher In the field of Accounting Research.

Mohaddeseh Ebrahimi is a PHD Accounting Student at Islamic Azad University, Tonekabon Branch. Her current fields of research interest include Health Care Accounting and Auditing Ethics in Accounting and Earning Management.

*Corresponding author (Mohammad Reza Pourali). E-mail: Pourali@iauc.ac.ir. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11L http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11L.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.147

11

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11M

DEVELOPMENT OF COMMUNITY CHARACTERISTICS ASSESSMENT TOOLS FOR SPEED LIMIT USING DECISION-MAKING THEORY: CASE OF THAILAND a

b*

Khanista Namee , Boonsap Witchayangkoon , Sanya Namee

c*

a

Department of Information Technology for Industry, Faculty of Industrial Technology and Management, King Mongkut's University of Technology North Bangkok, THAILAND b Department of Civil Engineering, Thammasat School of Engineering, Thammasat University, THAILAND c Department of Disaster Prevention and Mitigation, Bangkok, Royal Thai Government, THAILAND ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history Received 06 May 2019 Received in revised form 05 July 2019 Accepted 19 July 2019 Available online 01 August 2019

The traffic engineering measures for the speed limit in the residential area not only helps with road accident mitigation but also creates a pleasant environment for the residential areas and expands the space for pedestrians. The extensive study of numerous the speed limit measurements of other countries especially in Europe shows that it is important to incorporate other measurements to the existing laws to effectively enforce the speed limit in the residential area. The use of a decision-making support tool to set appropriate speed could lead to further analysis to improve the assessment of the areas that need an appropriate speed limit.

The decision tree related theory is used for specific decision tree analysis. Decision tree gives an effective decision structure where the decision and consequence are placed together. In this regard, the manual for the speed limit in the urban and municipality has been compiled by the World Health Organization and Thai Road Foundation by decision-making factors. The purpose of the manual is to ensure the same practice standard throughout Thailand. The development of this assessment tool is the creation of relationship according to the above factors to facilitate decision making and to communicate the involved officers with different knowledge and experience to make decisions with unity. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

Keywords: Traffic engineering measures; Road accident mitigation; Road Safety; WHO; Speed and Accident.

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 THE IMPORTANCE OF THE SPEED LIMIT AND ROAD ACCIDENTS IN THAILAND Road accident statistics from Royal Thai Police during 2008–2013 (Department of Highways, 2014) showed that the first five factors of road accidents were exceeding the speed limit, too close cutting, too close following, drunk driving, and illegal passing. Motorcycles ranked the first of *Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

1

affected vehicles followed by personal cars and trucks respectively. According to the Thai Road Traffic Act B.E.2522 and amended B.E.2538, the speed limit on highways shall not exceed 90 km./hr.

And 80 km./hr. in the municipality area. This speed limit does not include the areas where highways are connected to cities (transition zone). There were only signs telling drivers to slow down in the city area. It is stated that such signs must be put up not less than 125 meters and not more than 250 meters before entering city zones (Department of Highways, traffic signs manual, 2011). However, there is no specific definition of city zones, i.e. characteristics or number of population, and there is not the clear distance of such a transition zone as well. That is why drivers tend to drive with the same speed they are driving before entering the transition zone and only slow down when they are already in city zones. There are even drivers who still drive with the same speed in city zones which cause severe accidents in transition zones and city zones. In this regard, Road Safety Thailand has issued “People Report 2016” giving a conclusion of accident prevention and mitigation during 2016 new-year holidays. It was revealed that when compared with 2015 new year holidays, number of accidents, deaths, and injured were higher. The cause was drunk driving which was 24.3%; next was exceeding the speed limit which was 17.28%. Consequently, the prevention and reduction measurement of road accidents in 2016 was taken higher than that of 2015. The number of dead and injured during Songkran holidays in 2016 was also increased from 2015, and the first cause was exceeding the speed limit which was up to 32.93% (Department of Disaster Prevention and Mitigation, People Report 2016). Although less than drunk driving, it was even higher than the number during the new year holidays of the same year. This increasing number implies the need for management in city areas as a significant measure to reduce road accidents especially during New Year and Songkran holidays. If drinking is excluded from our parameters, we can see that exceeding the speed limit is the main cause of road accidents. The significant risk when using vehicles includes driving through city areas or city-like areas, the irresponsible use of road-side areas, and people activities in city areas. That’s why finding a way to assess a community where the speed limit management is needed is very important to move forward accident prevention and reduction measurement imposed by Road Safety Thailand. Statistical data of highway accidents in 2013 showed that exceeding the speed limit is the main cause of road accident or up to 75% of all causes and it is also the cause of injured pedestrians as shown in Table 1.

Table 1: Causes of highway accidents that lead to injured pedestrians Causes of accidents Exceeding the speed limit Too close cutting Failed to obey traffic lights/signs Drunk driving Dozing off Defective vehicle parts Others Total

No. of accidents 8,620 853 128 718 475 256 75 11,125

% 77.5 7.6 1.2 6.5 4.3 2.3 0.6 100.0

Pedestrians got hit 78 26 2 7 1 1 3 118

% 66.1 22.0 1.70 5.9 0.9 0.9 2.5 100.0

Source: Department of Highways, Thailand, Highway accidents report, 2013.

1.2 THE RELATION OF SPEED AND TRAFFIC ACCIDENTS When a vehicle moves with speed, kinetic energy has a direct variation with double speed, the braking distance is longer, and impact to any object is higher. The study of Australian Road Safety Bureau regarding breaking distance with various speed before hitting pedestrians in Australia showed

2

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

that with the speed of 60 km./hr., cars moving with such speed have normal braking distance on dry road (decision-making time and the time when drivers actually stop the car) at 36 meters while the speed limit in the city area is 50 km./hr. When hitting a pedestrian with such speed, death risk could go up to 80% (Transport Malta, 2012). The braking distance of a car with 50 km./hr. Speed is 28 meter. When speed is increased to 80 km/hr., braking distance becomes 57 meters. When hitting a pedestrian with a braking distance of 60 km/hr., such a vehicle would hit the pedestrian with a speed of 62 km/hr., as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Braking distance of vehicles and speed when hitting pedestrians.

Source: Impact Speed (Road Safety Education Resource) Australian Road Safety Bureau The Highways the speed limit is 90 km./hr. in Thailand. Geographically residential areas are located along with highways, and population density is perpendicularly distributed from both sides of highways. Characteristics of the community are clear to be seen, i.e. the number of houses, markets, etc. The number of houses is lower away and becoming high in other parts (as shown in figure 2). As such, most drivers tend to enter city zone with the same speed they did on highways despite the signs.

Expansion of community leads to population density nearing the signs, and involved units do not move the signs further and that’s why drivers are not aware that they are entering areas with population density which might cause serious accidents. Moreover, such involved units do not have a measurement to clearly set the transition zones.

Figure 2 areas of the community located along highways in Thailand Guidelines to set transition zones for speeding vehicles on highways before who are entering residential areas 2012 by National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) under *Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

3

Transportation Research Board (TRB) suggested that areas be categorized into 3 zones (as shown in figure 3) which are: Zone 1 rural zones where there is no speed limit. In the research, speed applied in these zones is 85th percentile before entering transition zones.

Zone 2 transition zones which comprise of 2 areas: 1. Perception – Reaction area: it takes approximately 2.5 seconds to be called perception-reaction area according to the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

Zone 3

2. Deceleration area: distance from when drivers use break until the speed is decelerated before entering community zones.

Community zone: according to the Road Traffic Act B.E.2552 and amended B.E. 2538, it is stated that in general circumstances, the legal speed of vehicles should be: 1. Trucks weighing over 1,200 kilograms or carrying passengers driving in Bangkok, Pattaya, or municipal areas, the speed should not exceed 60 km./hr., and not exceed 60 km./hr. outside the mentioned areas.

2. Other vehicles apart from 1: if they are towing cars, trucks weighing over 1,200 kilograms or auto-rickshaws driving in Bangkok, Pattaya, or municipal areas should drive the speed not exceeding 45 km./hr. or 60 km./hr. outside the mentioned areas.

3. In Bangkok, Pattaya, or municipal areas, speed should not exceed 80 km./hr. or 90 km./hr. outside the mentioned areas.

4. In case that the speed limit signs are available, drivers should not exceed the recommended speed

Figure 3: Transition zones (Source: NCHRP, 2012).

The 3Es measurement is recommended for the speed limit in community zones, it includes: 1. Enforcement, 2. Engineering, and 3. Education.

2. DEVELOPMENT OF ASSESSMENT TOOLS FOR SPEED LIMIT According to traffic engineering, it is found that slowing down in community zones is not only beneficial for accident severity decreasing, but also for creating a pleasant environment and pedestrian walking space increasing. Studies related to deceleration especially those of Europe showed that other measurements should be incorporated into legal ones in order to make efficient

4

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

the speed limit in community zones. Appropriate decision making assisting tools could lead to effective analysis for the development of community characteristics assessment tools for the speed limit using decision-making theory. The decision tree is appropriate for decision analysis because it separates decisions into branches. Such branches could then enable us to come up with an efficient structure showing options and consequences of such options. Abstracts are made apparent thus the assessment could be done. Another factor taken into account is decision making factors that World Health Organization (WHO) together with Thai Road Foundation have included in their guideline to the speed limit in city zones and municipal zones i.e. Road Risk Method. This method talks about the speed limit by physical and environmental factors that increase the risk of the accident. This development of assessment tool is thus a way to create relation using the above-mentioned factors in order to facilitate decision making and to communicate with the involved officials who have different knowledge and experience to make sure efficient decision is made together.

The decision to limit speed needs many factors. Each of them reflects the physical characteristics of the community which could lead to an appropriate speed. Decision tree analysis with branches separated gives us a picture of how consequences are linked. Further, decision tree analysis is able to respond to more than one decision-makers. This is because each added criterion means another branch is made. We have studied decision-making factors stated in the guidelines of the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas by World Health Organization (WHO) and Thai Road Foundation and found that this guideline has used decision tree analysis to assess community characteristics for the speed limit. After the literature review, we found a difference in how our targeted vehicles are categorized. In the guideline, vehicles are categorized into 3 types, with a difference of type 1 and type 3. However, the basic principle of the speed limit is similar in order to minimize confusion of decision making when developing the tool using decision tree analysis. We agreed to categorize vehicles according to the ministerial regulations in compliance with the Land Traffic Act B.E.2522 which stated 3 types of vehicles (1) trucks with total weight over 1,200 kilograms or with passengers (2) other vehicles apart from (1) with trailers, cars with total weigh over 1,200 kilograms or auto-rickshaws (3) other vehicles apart from (1) and (2) or motorcycles. Basic the speed limit in community zones should comply with Road Safety Thailand as shown in Table 2 and mentioned in section 1.2 (The Relation of Speed and Traffic Accidents) where community expansion results in population nearing the speed limit signs and the involved units do not move the signs causing the unawareness of drivers who drive with certain speed before entering community zones where traffic is heavier which could lead to serious accidents. Moreover, there is still no method to specify transition zones in Thailand. Minimum distance before entering the community zone with specific transition zones would reduce any unnecessary confusion of how fast a driver should drive. The recommended speed should be limited between 30 – 80 km./hr. and distance before changing speed should be between 300 – 800 meters.

Figure 4 showed that before entering the community zone, at 85th percentile drivers drive faster than 80 km./her. And at 50th percentile they drive at 70 km./hr. which is considered very high as shown in the area with low density. When considered the continuity in the transition zone when the driver is driving at 80 km/hr, it takes 800 meters. We can see that the transition zone is exactly where *Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

5

population density is low. This is helpful and can remove any unnecessary confusion regarding various speed needed on the same road with somewhat short intervals.

Figure 4 Speed survey on highway no.4016 before entering Nok Tah community, Nakorn Srithammarat (Piti et al, 2016)

3. SPEED LIMIT USING DECISION-MAKING THEORY Results from the study above showed that this information is relevant. Some minor details need to be amended according to the guideline of Road Safety Thailand. Committees meetings will be held to come up with “a guideline for community zone the speed limit management”. According to the guideline of the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas established by WHO and Thai Road Foundation using road risk method, community characteristics assessment tools for the speed limit using decision-making theory can be developed as follow:

3.1 STEP 1: BASIC THE SPEED LIMIT This is by types of vehicles and physical characteristics of roads. A table with details of such a relationship is created in compliance with “guideline of community zone the speed limit management” established by Road Safety Thailand. According to the said guideline, drivers driving in the low-density area are allowed to use the same speed and the only difference is types of vehicles.

Regarding physical characteristics of roads, we used the table as recommended by Safety Road

6

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

Thailand with different description but we are still communicating the same messages. Each table consists of 4 characteristics. Basic the speed limit set by the relation of vehicles and physical characteristics of roads is the first speed before using road risk method. The Decision tree is used for better understanding of involved personnel or committees who will be making the decision of appropriate speed in community zones.

Table 2: Basic the speed limit by the relation of types of vehicles and physical characteristics of roads The speed limit in the community zone (Bangkok, Pattaya, or municipal areas) not exceed (km./hr.)

The physical characteristic of roads

2 lanes 4 lanes (without traffic island) 4 lanes (with traffic island) More than 4 lanes

Type 1 Trucks with a total weight over 1,200 kg. or with passengers

Type 2 Other vehicles apart from 1 with trailers, cars with a total weight over 1,200 kg. or auto-rickshaws Refer to the Basic Road Traffic speed Act B.E.2522

Refer to the Road Traffic Act B.E.2522

Basic speed

60

40

45

60

50

60 60

Type 3 Other vehicles apart from 1 and 2 or motorcycles

Refer to the Road Traffic Act B.E.2522

Basic speed

40

80

40

45

45

80

50

50

45

45

80

50

60

45

45

80

60

When considered the relation of basic speed and road physical characteristics according to 3.2.2 in 2) to 4), we found that certain speed is chosen due to on-street parking. For example, the 4 lane road without traffic island and the left lane is occupied is considered two-way 2 lane road as shown in Table 2. For highways with partial traffic control with a frontage road, the consideration is made according to Table 2 as well but the main road and frontage road should be considered separately. Main roads with no more than 3 entrances and exits to frontage road per 1 kilometer are subject to add speed control value at 10 kilometer per hour. This is the consideration made for the transition zone, not the way to increase speed in this study. Therefore, to choose the speed in this step, we can refer to Table 2.

3.2 STEP 2: FINDING AN APPROPRIATE THE SPEED LIMIT After basic speed is chosen, we then use the road risk method to assess communities that need appropriate the speed limit. This method has been adjusted to fit risk factors of the actual driving environment in order to find appropriate speed. Adjustment is made according to Decision Tree as in Figure 5.

*Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

7

Five physical characteristics 1. roads without shoulders 2. roads with cars parked along shoulders

if one criterion is met, slow down 10 km./hr.

3. lanes occupied by parked cars are near usual lanes

Basic speed (km./hr.)

4. roads with without partition

bicycle

lanes

5. a lot of pedestrians

if more than 1 / all criteria are met, slow down 10 km./hr.

if no criterion is met, drive with basic speed according to relation of types of vehicles and road characteristics

Figure 5 Decision tree to find appropriate speed In the WHO’s “guideline for the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas” Section 3.2.3 in 2) to 4) has been used as the criterion to choose road characteristics in step 1 in order to set basic speed. After that, we assessed the physical characteristics of the roads and the use of road shoulders.

If one of the criterions is met, the appropriate speed will be decreased by 10 km./hr. If no criterion is met, the appropriate speed is similar to basic speed.

The development of assessment tools is made by guideline established by Road Safety Thailand and WHO. We adjusted basic speed according to the Road Traffic Act B.E. 2522. We incorporated the road risk method to assess the communities that need the appropriate speed limit. However, regarding the distance needed to change speed, we have adapted our past studies in the area with low population density, i.e. the transition zones are assigned before community zones. Regarding the development of the speed limit guideline to be submitted to Road Traffic Management Sub-committee, a certain adjustment is needed to accommodate guideline of Road Safety Thailand.

This includes 1) needs of people or community leaders 2) data from private organizations or academic offices that identify the needs of the speed limit in community 3) suggestions from Provincial Road Safety 4) needs of landowners where signs must be put up. All these would bring success to the speed limit in a concrete way.

4. IMPLEMENTATION AND COMMUNITY ASSESSMENT FOR APPROPRIATE SPEED LIMIT The development of community assessment tools is to adopt the established guideline by Road Safety Thailand the suggestions from WHO. Basic speed is adjusted under the Road Traffic Act B.E.2522. We incorporated the road risk method to assess communities that need an appropriate speed limit. Transition zones in the past studies have been adopted in areas with low population

8

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

density, i.e. these areas are assigned as transition zones. The development of guideline to be submitted to the sub-committee needs additional guideline to comply with Road Safety Thailand which includes 1) needs of people or community leaders 2) data from private organizations or academic offices that identify the needs of the speed limit in community 3) suggestions from Provincial Road Safety 4) needs of landowners where signs must be put up as shown in the appendix.

Figure 6 speed evaluation for Highway no.356, Thailand.

To fill out the form, start first with part 1 which is general information of the analyzing person, date, responsible office, population density, distance, and traffic characteristics. These data will be used for the speed limit according to physical characteristics of roads and to make sure the limited speed is in accordance with basic speed table. Basic speed according to types of vehicle will then be filled out. Please note that types of vehicles categorized by the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas manual are different from that stated in the Road Traffic Act B.E.2522. After part 2 of the form is filled out, adjust the speed lower according to the five criteria of road characteristics as you can see in part 3. Highway 356 does not have any characteristics that meet the criterion, so drivers here are allowed to use basic speed as shown in figure 6. Thai Road Foundation has analyzed characteristics of communities and roads and now they have come up with a network of municipal roads. Characteristics of roads can be defined by how the land is used, but we all know that in a community there exist many buildings such as government offices, houses, business areas, shopping malls, all of which need a road network. The speed limiting using this network could lead *Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

9

to appropriate speed despite the intervals.

Figure 7 the last step of the speed limit of highway no.356

Figure 8 last result of the appropriate speed limit of a road network Characteristics of communities and roads could help us choose the appropriate speed as shown in figure 8 which shows a road network.

The operation of the Provincial Disaster Prevention and Mitigation to present data and needs that will be submitted to the land traffic management sub-committee is a part of how Road Safety Thailand is moving forward. The Development of Community Characteristics Assessment Tools for The speed limit using Decision Making Theory. The development of this assessment tool was also discussed in the meeting of the Road Safety Thailand committee in order to come up with a “guideline of community areas the speed limit management”. The development of this tool is also by

10

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

“guideline of the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas” established by WHO and Thai Road Safety where road risk method is incorporated. The decision tree has been chosen as a way to make a systematic decision.

5. CONCLUSION The Study, review, and implementation have been done in Chachoengsao province. We have developed a community assessment for the speed limit using decision-making theory. Our study will be submitted to road traffic sub-committee for further consideration. This then will become a procedure taken by traffic police to limit vehicle speed in community zones. However, 4 points to be considered include 1) needs of people or community leaders 2) data from private organizations or academic offices that identify the needs of the speed limit in community 3) suggestions from Provincial Road Safety 4) needs of the landowners where signs must be put up such as within the industrial estate area.

Certain adjustments have been made within the frame of the established guideline such as “the speed limit management in community zones” and “guideline for the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas” established by WHO and Thai Road Foundation. Road risk method has been incorporated to develop the community assessment tool. The adjustment results in some differences as follow: -

Categorization of vehicle types that lead to the basic speed limit but still within the regulation of Road Safety Thailand and Road Traffic Act B.E.2552

-

Speed table has been adjusted according to the basic speed but still within the regulation of guideline for the speed limit in city zones and municipal areas established by WHO and Thai Road Foundation

-

Certain areas with less population density have been assigned as transition zones.

This is done by researches and facts.

-

Deceleration adjustment using the road risk method is helpful when developing a community assessment tool. We also used the decision tree as a tool for deceleration criterion until the appropriate speed is reached.

Our operation includes another 4 points to be considered which is important for decision making.

Furthermore, another step we have taken is to organize a training program regarding the speed limit.

This is a way to support the work of Disaster Prevention and Mitigation where the secretary of Road Safety Thailand can take part.

No matter what the cause is, the severity of road accidents always involves speeding. Solving the speeding problem is very important to minimize the number of deaths from road accidents. Road Safety Thailand pays so much attention to this matter and the implementation of such a solution should be done as soon as possible. We have studied, reviewed academic literature, and with our past professional experience and found that problems of road accidents cannot be solved by each party separately and there is no specific step of operation due to the total difference of each area and *Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

11

management of each province. Road accidents problems should be solved by the utility. What has been done is beneficial to what will be done next. To limit speed in community zones, we should pay attention to various areas not only the highways as stated in Highway Act B.E. 2535. We should keep in mind that big villages, industrial estates, or some government offices take up a lot of space such as military camps or hospitals. The areas where these offices are located should be included also when considering the speed limit.

Lastly, communities, people, and leaders of the community should be aware of the speed limit within their communities, not only traffic officers. Paying attention to the speed limit management is important to minimize the number of accidents in their severity in community zones.

6. AVAILABILITY OF DATA AND MATERIAL Data is used or generated from this study is available upon request to the corresponding author.

7. REFERENCES Baker, D., Bridges, D., Hunter, R., Johnson, G., Krupa, J., Sorenson, K., (2001). Guidebook to Decision-Making Methods. Developed for the Department of Energy.

FHWA (2012). Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2009 Ed.with Revision Numbers 1 and 2 incorporated, dated May 2012, US Federal Highway Administration.

Glickman, T.S., (1983). Rerouting railroad shipments for hazardous material to avoid populated area. Accident Analysis Prevention 15.

Huizingh, K. R. E. and H. C. j. Vrolijk., (1994), Decision Support for Information Systems Management: Applying Analytic Hierarchy Process. Organizations and Management.

Kloeden, C. N., McLean, A. J. & Glonek, G. (2002). Reanalysis of Travelling Speed and the Risk of Crash Involvement in Adelaide South Australia. In: OECD (2006). Speed Management. OECD Publishing.

Kloeden, C. N., McLean, A. J., Moore, V. M. & Ponte, G. (1997). Travelling Speed and the Risk of Crash Involvement. In: OECD (2006). Speed Management. OECD Publishing.

Kloeden, C. N., Ponte, G. & McLean, A. J. (2001). Travelling Speed and the Risk of Crash Involvement on Rural Roads. In: OECD (2006). Speed Management. OECD Publishing.

Nilsson, G. (2004). Traffic Safety Dimensions and the Power Model to Describe the Effect of Speed on Safety.

Lund: Lund Institute of Technology, Department of Technology and Society.

OECD/EMCT (2006). Speed Management. OECD Publishing.

Pananun, W., Raksuntorn, W., Witchayangkoon, B., Raksuntorn, N., & Chayanan, S. (2018). Traffic Management at T Intersections with Always-Thru Traffic. International Transaction Journal of Engineering Management & Applied Sciences & Technologies, 9(5), 447-454.

Piti Jantaruthai et al, Study of Speed Adjustment before Entering The speed limit Zones, Rajabhat University, Nakorn Srithammarat.

Road Safety Thailand, Department of Disaster Prevention and Mitigation: Speed Management Guideline for Community Zones, 2016.

Transportation Institute, (1979), Complete Report: Road Network Development to Support Merchandise Transportation in Cholburi Province, Chulalongkorn University.

UK Department for Transport. (2016). The Highway Code: General rules, techniques and advice for all drivers and riders.

Retrieved 5 December 2016 from

12

Khanista Namee, Boonsap Witchayangkoon, Sanya Namee

www.gov.uk/guidance/the-highway-code/general-rules-techniques-and-advice-for-all-drivers-and-rid ers-103-to-158.

World Health Organization (WHO) of Thailand and Thai Road Foundation. 2017. The speed limit in City Zones and Municipal Areas.

Dr. Khanista Namee is an Assistant Professor at the Department of Information Technology for Industry, Faculty of Industrial Technology and Management, King Mongkut's University of Technology North Bangkok, Thailand, Prachinburi Campus. She earned her Bachelor’s degree from the Suranaree University of Technology, Master’s degree from Kasetsart University, Thailand, and a PhD degree from University of Salford, UK. Her research interests include IoT, Cloud Computing, GIS, Big Data Analytics, Computer Communication, and Network.

Dr. Boonsap Witchayangkoon is an Associate Professor at Department of Civil Engineering, Thammasat University. He received his B.Eng. from the King Mongkut’s University of Technology Thonburi with Honors in 1991. He continued his Ph.D. study at University of Maine, USA, where he obtained his Ph.D. in Spatial Information Science & Engineering. Dr. Witchayangkoon current interests involve applications of emerging technologies to engineering.

Dr. Sanya Namee works at the Department of Disaster Prevention and Mitigation, Ministry of Interior, Thailand. He holds a Bachelor of Engineering from King Mongkut's Institute of Technology Ladkrabang, a Master of Engineering degree from Prince of Songkhla University and a Ph.D. degree in Civil Engineering from Thammasat University, Thailand. His research interests encompass hazardous material transport.

*Corresponding authors (B.Witchayangkoon, S.Namee). E-mail: drboonsap@gmail.com, sanya_ard@yahoo.com ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11M http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11M.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.148

13

©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies

International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

PAPER ID: 10A11N

SLOPE STABILIZATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PONDS: CASE STUDY OF KHON BURI SUGAR MILL FACTORY, THAILAND Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab a b

a*

, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

b

Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, South East Asia University, THAILAND. Department of Civil Engineering, Thammasat School of Engineering, Thammasat University, THAILAND.

ARTICLEINFO

A B S T RA C T

Article history: Received 12 April 2019 Received in revised form 15 July 2019 Accepted 25 July 2019 Available online 02 August 2019

This study improves the soil stability of wastewater treatment ponds of Khon Buri Sugar Mills, located at Amphoe Khon Buri, Nakhon Ratchasima Province, Thailand. The wastewater treatment system consists of two areas. The first area contains 15 wastewater treatment ponds with a total area of 212 rai (83.8 acres). The second area has three wastewater treatment ponds with a total area of 103 rai Keywords: (40.7 acres). The characteristic of local soil is dispersive soil with the Slope Stability; Slope degree of dispersive about 50.50 by double hydrometer test. The analysis; Counter Berm; slope stabilization of ponds calculated using KUslope® program found Hierarchy scoring that 11 ponds have the safety factor is less than 1.5. There are three method; Engineering methods that suitable for stabilization with surface protection including practices; KUslope; Buttress by Counter Berm, Sheet pile wall, and Cement Column. Using Safety factor; Geotechnical Engineering. the hierarchy method, the study finds that the best suitable method of slope stabilization is Buttress by Counter Berm with surface protection.

The weight of Counter Berm is to use soil-cement with a ratio of soil and cement is 7:1 by weight. The density of soil-cement is 1.95 g/cm3. After the improvement of slope stability, the safety factors of all slopes are more than 1.5. © 2019 INT TRANS J ENG MANAG SCI TECH.

1. INTRODUCTION The soil at different locations will have different soil engineering properties. Computations of slope stability have been suggested by Janbu (1973), Lee (1996). The modern slope stability analysis is to use a finite element analysis method such as Griffiths and Lane (1999). Soil slope stability and stabilization methods have been summarized e.g. by Abramson et al. (2001), Duncan et al. (2014). Chearnkiatpradab (2005; 2015) discussed the expert system for slope stabilization.

To increase strength of soil slope stability and stabilization, there are many methods that can be used such as by adding RC piles (Poulos, 1995), using soil-cement for soft soil stabilization (Chen & Wang, 2006), using liquid ionic stabilizer suitable for subgrade and base soils (Katz et al, 2001). *Corresponding authors (B.Chearnkiatpradab). Tel: +66-816363799. Email: paebangmod@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11N http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11N.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.149

1

Chearnkiatpradab and Mairaing (2002) evaluated soil slope stabilization for the Bangpakong river bank and Namkor watered area.

2. SLOPE FAILURE OF WASTEWATER PONDS OF KHON BURI SUGAR MILL Khon Buri Sugar Mill is located at Amphoe Khon Buri, Nakhon Ratchasima Province, the Northeastern region of Thailand. The sugar mill has a problem with the wastewater treatment system. Some slopes of wastewater pond are failures so it made the wastewater treatment system cannot treat properly. The wastewater pond has 2 parts total 18 ponds as shown in Figure 1

(a) Wastewater pond Area 1

(b) Wastewater pond Area 2

Figure 1: The wastewater pond of Khon Buri Sugar Mill Factory.

3. SCOPE OF ANALYSIS The scope of slope analysis is specified as the followings a. The number of soil boring is a total of 18 holes spread throughout the two areas of wastewater ponds. The location of each boring hole as shown in Figure2. Data on soil property for slope analysis is used from the beneath soil boring location.

Area 2 Area 1

Figure 2: The geo-location of boring holes (courtesy of Google Earth).

2

Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

b. The surcharge load for analysis is one ton per square meter c. The water level for analysis is separate in two cases as below 1) The water level in the wastewater pond is empty. Slope failure analysis is analyzed inside the pond as upstream slope, U/S. 2) The water in the wastewater pond is full. Slope failure analysis is analyzed outside the pond as downstream slope, D/S. d. The allowable of safety factor (SF) for slope failure is 1.5.

(a) Water level is empty Upstream Slope (U/S) analysis

(b) Water level is full Downstream Slope (D/S) analysis Figure 3: The two cases of wastewater pond’s slope analysis.

4. THE ENGINEERING PROPERTY AND DISPERSION OF SOIL 4.1 THE ENGINEERING PROPERTY OF SOIL From the summarized soil testing, most of soil is silty sand (SM). some boring holes are found clayey sand (SC) and clay. After analyzing the soil data with the depth of each borehole it can show as Figures 4 and 5

Figure 4: Soil Property of soil with depth at area 1.

*Corresponding authors (B.Chearnkiatpradab). Tel: +66-816363799. Email: paebangmod@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11N http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11N.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.149

3

Figure 5: Soil Property of soil with depth at area 2.

4.2 DETERMINATION THE DISPERSION OF SOIL Dispersive soils are those in which the clay content has a high percentage of sodium so the clay fraction readily breaks down to form a suspension in water. In Thailand, the dispersive soils are widely distributed in northeastern and eastern area region. The colors of dispersive soil in Thailand are reddish-brown, brown and gray. The black soil that has high content in organic matter is not found in dispersive soils. The soil slope and color of soil shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Dispersive soil slope of the Khon Buri Sugar Mill Factory.

The dispersion of soil was determined by the double hydrometer test according to ASTM D4221– 99 (2005) as Degree of Dispersion =

%finer more than 0.005 mm without chemical dispersion %finer more than 0.005 mm with chemical dispersion

× 100

(1).

The ASTM D4221-99 Standard stated that the value under 30% classified as nondispersive (ND), 30-50% classified as intermediate dispersive (ID), >50% classified as highly dispersive (HD) From testing the degree of dispersive of soil by double hydrometer testing, the degree of

4

Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

dispersive is about 50.50 so the local soil of wastewater treatment pond is highly dispersive soil (HD) as shown in Figure 7.

DOUBLE HYDROMETER TEST (ASTM D 422 , ASTM D 4221) Standard Hydrometer (with chemical dispersant) Double Hydrometer

Diameter (mm.) 0.0290 0.0163 0.0120 0.0086 0.0062 0.0044 0.0037 0.0032 0.0029 0.0017 0.0015 %Passing 65.85 64.35 60.29 58.56 55.69 51.87 40.19 33.42 31.46 27.74 23.59

(without chemical dispersant)

Diameter (mm.) 0.0470 0.0335 0.0240 0.0172 0.0127 0.0091 0.0065 0.0046 0.0038 0.0033 0.0030 %Passing 60.23 49.64 43.58 42.60 40.76 34.51 29.05 26.25 21.35 19.21 14.42

Degree of Dispersive : DDS %

50.50

Percent passing

With chemical dispersant ASTMD422 100.00 80.00 60.00 40.00 20.00 0.00 0.0010

Diameter (mm.)

0.0100

Diameter (mm)

0.1000

Figure 7: Double Hydrometer Test of soil

5. THE STABILITY ANALYSIS OF SLOPE The stability analysis of wastewater pond was analyzed by KUslope®, slope stability analysis program developed by Geotechnical Engineering Research and Development (GERD) Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Kasetsart University Thailand (Rattatham, 2004).

The total 38 sections were analyzed by the locations as shown in Figure 8. The summary result of the safety factor (SF) from the analysis is shown in Table 1.

Figure 8: The location of the analysis section. *Corresponding authors (B.Chearnkiatpradab). Tel: +66-816363799. Email: paebangmod@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11N http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11N.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.149

5

Table 1: Result of safety factor (SF) from analysis of wastewater pond

When plotting the value of the safety factor of each section, see Figure 9, all of the safety factors are greater than 1.00, but some slopes need improvements because safety factor is less than 1.50.

The example of slope analysis before stabilized by KUslope® is shown in Figure 10.

Figure 9: Summarized of safety factor from the slope stability analysis.

6. THE SLOPE STABILIZATION Most of soil slope failure occurs from soil slopes that have insufficient shear strengths due to 1. There is too much water in the soil mass that causes the soil to have less shear strength.

2. The mass of soil slope is too large or has an external weight to be done on the soil slope thus the soil slope is not stable.

6

Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

(a) Empty upstream slope, U/S. (b)Full downstream slope, D/S Figure 10: Slope stability analysis of section 1-1 by KUslope® program Therefore the principles of slope stabilization reduce the force acting on the soil slope such as digging the soil from slope and prepare the drainage system to reduce the pore water pressure or increase the resisting force and reduce the driving force at the same time.

The resistance of the slope can be increased by the following reasons: 1. Unloading o Unloading is the technique for moving the unstable soil out of slope to reduce the driving for from slope such as benching slope, excavation 2. Buttressing o Buttressing is a simple method to increase slope stability by increasing the weight of the material at the toe, which creates a counterforce that resists slope failure such as counter berm, rock buttressing 3. Drainage o Drainage systems are one of the most effective remedial measures against slope instability due to their capacity to reduce pore-water pressure in the subsoil, increasing the shear strength of the soil.

4. Reinforcement o The slope reinforcement method is the technique for stabilizing slope by installing a system of reinforcing such as components metal bars or other rod-shaped to resist the slope failure by using the tensile resistance and torque resistance of the components such as soil nailing, geosynthetic reinforcement.

5. Retaining wall o Retaining wall is the technique for protecting the soil slope by using structure such as sheet pile, retaining wall.

6. Surface Slope protection by vegetation o Surface slope protection by vegetation is the technique to protect the erosion of soil slope surface by plant. Planting with shrubs adds vegetative cover and strong root systems, which in turn will enhance slope stability.

7. Soil Hardening o Soil hardening is the method to increase the soil strength by mixing lime or cement with soil such as a lime column or cement column.

The suitable method for stabilized the wastewater pond depends on many factors such as time for construction, cost of construction and maintenance, technology and local material use From the schematic diagram for analyzing the suitable stabilization method as shown in *Corresponding authors (B.Chearnkiatpradab). Tel: +66-816363799. Email: paebangmod@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11N http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11N.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.149

7

Figure11. It has derived three methods for stabilizing the soil slope with surface protection. Those methods are Buttress by Counter Berm, Sheet pile wall, and Cement Column. The most suitable method for stabilized slope can be derived from comparing the score by hierarchy method as shown in table 2. The comparative for selected the best suitable method for stabilization has four factors, time for construction, Construction cost, Maintenance cost and Technology and local material use consequently. The comparative scale is given as 1 for the minimum, 2 for medium and 3 for maximum. The best suitable method is the method that has the lowest of the comparative score.

Figure 11: The schematic diagram for analyzed the suitable stabilization method (modified from Chearnkiatpradab (2005)).

Table 2: The hierarchy table of the comparative score for the stabilization method Stabilization Method Counter berm Sheet pile wall Cement Column Time for construction 1 3 2 Construction Cost 1 2 3 Maintenance Cost 3 2 1 Technology and local material use 1 3 2 Total Score 6 10 8 Remark: 1 minimum, 2 medium, 3 maximum Activity

Table 2, the Counter berm has the lowest score so it the best suitable method that combines with surface protection to stabilization the soil slope of wastewater treatment pond. The counter berm uses the local soil mixed with Portland cement type 1 by the ratio of soil to Portland cement 7:1 by weight. From this ratio, the soil-cement has compressive strength 8 ksc (kilogram-force per square centimeter) and unit weight is 1.95 g/cm3.

After stabilizing the wastewater treatment pond slope by counter berm the safety factor of the slope is increased to greater than 1.5 of all sections as shown in Table 3

8

Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

Table 3: Result of safety factor (SF) after Stabilized by the counter berm.

The example of slope analysis after stabilized by KUslope® is shown in Figure 12 and the typical drawing of the counter berm is shown in Figure 13.

(a) Section 6-1 (b) Section 12-1 Figure 12: Slope stability analysis after stabilized by Counter Berm of section 6-1 and 12-1

Figure 13: Typical drawing of the counter berm.

7. CONCLUSION The best suitable method for stabilized the wastewater treatment pond is counter berm with surface protection. The berm is used the local soil mix with Portland cement type 1 by the ratio of soil: Portland cement is 7:1 by weight from this ratio the unit weight of soil-cement is 1.95 g/cm3 and strength 8.07 ksc.

8. DATA AVAILABILITY STATEMENT The used or generated data are available upon request to the corresponding author. *Corresponding authors (B.Chearnkiatpradab). Tel: +66-816363799. Email: paebangmod@gmail.com. ©2019 International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies. Volume 10 No.11 ISSN 2228-9860 eISSN 1906-9642 CODEN: ITJEA8 Paper ID:10A11N http://TUENGR.COM/V10A/10A11N.pdf DOI: 10.14456/ITJEMAST.2019.149

9

9. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The authors thank the Khon Buri Sugar Mill, Amphoe Khon Buri, Nakhon Ratchasima Province for serving the data and material for this project.

10. REFERENCES Abramson, L. W., Lee, T. S., Sharma, S., & Boyce, G. M. (2001). Slope stability and stabilization methods. John Wiley & Sons.

ASTM D4221-99, (2005). Standard Test Method for Dispersive Characteristics of Clay Soil by Double Hydrometer. ASTM International, www.astm.org.

Chearnkiatpradab, B. (2005). Expert System for Slope Stabilization. International Conference on Geotechnical Engineering for Disaster Mitigation & Rehabilitation, Singapore.

Chearnkiatpradab, B. (2015). Expert System for Slope Stabilization on Bangkok Clay.

Transactions on Engineering & Applied Sciences. Volume 4. No 2

American

Chearnkiatpradab, B., Mairaing. W. (2002). Evaluation of soil slope stabilization case studies: Bangpakong river bank and Namkor watered area, Proceeding of the eighth National Convention on civil engineering, Vol 2, Khon Khan, Thailand.

Chen, H., & Wang, Q. (2006). The behaviour of organic matter in the process of soft soil stabilization using cement. Bulletin of Engineering Geology and the Environment, 65(4), 445-448.

Duncan, J. M., Wright, S. G., & Brandon, T. L. (2014). Soil strength and slope stability. John Wiley & Sons.

Griffiths, D. V., & Lane, P. A. (1999). Slope stability analysis by finite elements. Geotechnique, 49(3), 387-403.

Janbu, N. (1973). Slope stability computations. John Wiley and Sons.

Lee W. Abramson et al. 1996. Slope Stability and Stabilization Method, John Wiley & Sons Inc., USA Poulos, H. G. (1995). Design of reinforcing piles to increase slope stability. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, 32(5), 808-818.

Rattatham, I. (2004). Generalized Limit Equilibrium Development for Slope Stability Program by Generalized Limit Equilibrium. Master’s degree Thesis of Engineering, Kasetsart University, Thailand.

Dr.Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab is a Lecturer at Department of Civil Engineering, South East Asia University.

He received his B.Eng and M.Eng. from King Mongkut’s University of Technology Thonburi. He earned the Doctor of Engineering degree from Kasetsart University, Thailand. He is interested in Soil Stabilization and Soil Slope Failure and Soil Database.

Dr.Boonsap Witchayangkoon is an Associate Professor at Department of Civil Engineering at Thammasat University. He received his B.Eng. from King Mongkut’s University of Technology Thonburi with Honors. He continued his PhD study at University of Maine, USA, where he obtained his PhD in Spatial Information Science & Engineering. Dr. Witchayangkoon current interests involve applications of emerging technologies to engineering.

Trademarks Disclaimer: All product names including trademarks™ or registered® trademarks mentioned in this article are the property of their respective owners, using for identification purposes only. The use of them does not imply any endorsement or affiliation.

10

Boonchai Chearnkiatpradab, Boonsap Witchayangkoon

:: International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies http://TuEngr.com

Call-for-Papers: ITJEMAST invites you to submit high quality papers for full peer-review and possible publication in areas pertaining to our scope including engineering, science, management and technology, especially interdisciplinary/crossdisciplinary/multidisciplinary subjects.

More Research Publication Available at

http://TUENGR.COM

Submit your science research today.

:: International Transaction Journal of Engineering, Management, & Applied Sciences & Technologies